<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=WikiSysop</id>
		<title>Help - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=WikiSysop"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php/Special:Contributions/WikiSysop"/>
		<updated>2026-05-04T12:57:00Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.27.0</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Social_Page_Creator&amp;diff=809</id>
		<title>Social Page Creator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Social_Page_Creator&amp;diff=809"/>
				<updated>2015-05-05T20:19:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In today's world to keep up with the industry you need to be connected though social media. Social Page Creator helps you grow your fan base by creating professionally designed Facebook, Twitter and Linkedin pages. Think of your social pages as &amp;quot;welcome mats&amp;quot; as your business's branded &amp;quot;welcome mat&amp;quot;, a special place that quickly shows visitors what your business is all about. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Social Page Creator allows you to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Customized a social media road map &lt;br /&gt;
*Setup and ongoing engagement on major social networks like Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn &lt;br /&gt;
*Monitoring of your social presence and online reputation &lt;br /&gt;
*Growing followers and fan base Monthly reports with recommendations for contests, polls and integration into overall marketing plans &lt;br /&gt;
*Optional add-ons including custom blog posts, email marketing campaigns, and press releases&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=CRM_Chat&amp;diff=808</id>
		<title>CRM Chat</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=CRM_Chat&amp;diff=808"/>
				<updated>2015-05-05T20:14:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
This chat feature will connect you with your business clients. The chat will appear as a chart where you can see your clients, what kind of plans they have and you can add additional options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This chat feature will connect you with your business clients. The chat will appear as a chart where you can see your clients, what kind of plans they have and you can add additional options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Embed Chat to Your Website =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To embed the chat feature into your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Embed Chat to Your Website'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you can select a defaut department either '''Sales''' or '''Support&amp;amp;nbsp;'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the default message number&lt;br /&gt;
#Next click the '''Select and Copy''' button and paste it into the body of your website.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Add Chat Operators&amp;amp;nbsp; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose the number of operators you would like to add to your website. &amp;amp;nbsp;You can add up to 50 operators.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Chat Settings&amp;amp;nbsp; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to change you company name, sales email or support email you can do that here. Just enter the new information in and press modify,&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Chat Password&amp;amp;nbsp; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the password on your chat application simply enter the new password and press '''Change Password'''.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Domain_Privacy&amp;diff=807</id>
		<title>Domain Privacy</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Domain_Privacy&amp;diff=807"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T17:56:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;=Overview=  Keeping your personal information private on the internet is a hard task. That is why we offer Domain Privacy to help protect you! When you register a domain name,...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Keeping your personal information private on the internet is a hard task. That is why we offer Domain Privacy to help protect you! When you register a domain name, your information is stored in a public database called the &amp;quot;Whois&amp;quot; database. This standard domain name registration process can expose your personal contact information to the general public. We simply mask your email with ours and place a forward to your email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Website_Chat&amp;diff=806</id>
		<title>Website Chat</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Website_Chat&amp;diff=806"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:36:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;Category:Setup&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Social_Page_Creator&amp;diff=805</id>
		<title>Social Page Creator</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Social_Page_Creator&amp;diff=805"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:28:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot; Category:Setup&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=804</id>
		<title>Instant Logo Creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=804"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:20:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No previous purchases of this logo have been made which means it's exclusively yours! The logo you choose will not be offered in our gallery for future purchases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your logo will continue to be available for other customers to purchase and use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retire Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This logo may have been purchased before. But once you have purchased your logo it will be retired and no longer sold in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create Your Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Name&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Slogan &lt;br /&gt;
#Once entered, it will appear in each of the logos in the gallery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find a logo you like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the logo &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a logo option: '''Exclusive''', '''Non-Exclusive''' or '''Retire Non-Exclusive''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue through checkout process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once purchased:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to '''My Services'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Logo Management'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Download your Logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Marketing]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=803</id>
		<title>Instant Logo Creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=803"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:19:59Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No previous purchases of this logo have been made which means it's exclusively yours! The logo you choose will not be offered in our gallery for future purchases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your logo will continue to be available for other customers to purchase and use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retire Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This logo may have been purchased before. But once you have purchased your logo it will be retired and no longer sold in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create Your Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Name&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Slogan &lt;br /&gt;
#Once entered, it will appear in each of the logos in the gallery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find a logo you like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the logo &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a logo option: '''Exclusive''', '''Non-Exclusive''' or '''Retire Non-Exclusive''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue through checkout process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once purchased:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to '''My Services'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Logo Management'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Download your Logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;[[Category:Marketing]]&amp;quot;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=802</id>
		<title>Instant Logo Creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=802"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:19:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No previous purchases of this logo have been made which means it's exclusively yours! The logo you choose will not be offered in our gallery for future purchases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your logo will continue to be available for other customers to purchase and use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retire Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This logo may have been purchased before. But once you have purchased your logo it will be retired and no longer sold in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create Your Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Name&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Slogan &lt;br /&gt;
#Once entered, it will appear in each of the logos in the gallery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find a logo you like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the logo &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a logo option: '''Exclusive''', '''Non-Exclusive''' or '''Retire Non-Exclusive''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue through checkout process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once purchased:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to '''My Services'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Logo Management'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Download your Logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[&amp;quot;Category:Marketing&amp;quot;]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=801</id>
		<title>Instant Logo Creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=801"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:18:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No previous purchases of this logo have been made which means it's exclusively yours! The logo you choose will not be offered in our gallery for future purchases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your logo will continue to be available for other customers to purchase and use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retire Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This logo may have been purchased before. But once you have purchased your logo it will be retired and no longer sold in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create Your Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Name&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Slogan &lt;br /&gt;
#Once entered, it will appear in each of the logos in the gallery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find a logo you like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the logo &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a logo option: '''Exclusive''', '''Non-Exclusive''' or '''Retire Non-Exclusive''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue through checkout process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once purchased:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to '''My Services'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Logo Management'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Download your Logo&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Category:Marketing&amp;quot;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=800</id>
		<title>Instant Logo Creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=800"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:16:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No previous purchases of this logo have been made which means it's exclusively yours! The logo you choose will not be offered in our gallery for future purchases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your logo will continue to be available for other customers to purchase and use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retire Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This logo may have been purchased before. But once you have purchased your logo it will be retired and no longer sold in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create Your Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Name&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Slogan &lt;br /&gt;
#Once entered, it will appear in each of the logos in the gallery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Category:Setup&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find a logo you like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the logo &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a logo option: '''Exclusive''', '''Non-Exclusive''' or '''Retire Non-Exclusive''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue through checkout process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once purchased:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to '''My Services'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Logo Management'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Download your Logo&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=799</id>
		<title>Instant Logo Creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Instant_Logo_Creation&amp;diff=799"/>
				<updated>2015-04-16T15:15:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;= Overview  =  If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery.   == Exclusive...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need a logo quickly we've got you covered with our Instant Logo Creation. Choose from a large variety of ready to go logos in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No previous purchases of this logo have been made which means it's exclusively yours! The logo you choose will not be offered in our gallery for future purchases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your logo will continue to be available for other customers to purchase and use. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retire Non-Exclusive ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This logo may have been purchased before. But once you have purchased your logo it will be retired and no longer sold in our gallery. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create Your Logo =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Name&lt;br /&gt;
#Your Company Slogan &lt;br /&gt;
#Once entered, it will appear in each of the logos in the gallery&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you find a logo you like: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the logo &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a logo option: '''Exclusive''', '''Non-Exclusive''' or '''Retire Non-Exclusive''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Order Now'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Continue through checkout process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once purchased:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to '''My Services'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Logo Management'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Download your Logo&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Analytics&amp;diff=798</id>
		<title>Analytics</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Analytics&amp;diff=798"/>
				<updated>2014-10-17T13:10:23Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Analytics application provides a complete view of your website analytics and usage.&lt;br /&gt;
Analytics application will not work on a webpage if it doesn't have '&amp;lt;/body&amp;gt;'tag . Please make sure that your webpages have '&amp;lt;/body&amp;gt;' tag, if not please add it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu consists of the following sections: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Statistics &lt;br /&gt;
*Management &lt;br /&gt;
*Advanced &lt;br /&gt;
*Settings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Statistics  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to view statistics on your website, including KPI's, visitor, hardware and software statistics. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Website Usage  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics for this menu item provide information about visitor behavior on your website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits per page  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the number of page impressions and visits for individual pages. The information is displayed in a diagram, which can be changed by clicking one of the icons. Alternatively, this information can be displayed as a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits per area  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides a complete overview of the number of page impressions and visits in relation to specific areas of a page. The information is presented in the form of a diagram which can be changed by pressing one of the icons, and a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the Information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PIs per Levels  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the PIs (page impressions) for the selected time period using the available page names and sub-divides these into levels. The level sub-division is carried out using the set separator in the page name. Detailed information on how the page names can be defined are found under ‘Integrating the pixel-code’. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The hierarchical levels are displayed using a tree view. The percentages are displayed absolute to the highest level and relative to the next higher level. If a link to the page is available, clicking this page element will take the user to the stored page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PIs per Customer  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the visits and PIs of the logged-in user’s various accounts (for example, tracked websites) for the selected time period. The user’s accounts are displayed in hierarchical levels. The hierarchical levels are displayed using a tree view. The percentages are displayed absolute to the highest level and relative to the next higher level. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Downloads  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of how often certain documents have been downloaded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Events  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the number of triggered events for the selected time period and sub-divides these into levels. The percentages are displayed absolute to the highest level and relative to the next higher level. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Duration Per Page  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the entire duration on a page for the selected period. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the[name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Duration per Visit  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the average duration on a page per visit for the selected period. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Duration per PI  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the average duration per PI (page impression) on a page for the selected period. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clickpaths in/out  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the visitor clickpaths –both in and out. These paths describe the specific click patterns visitors use to navigate through a website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram. By the panel “Selection” or through a direct click on a page, the user can select a page for which the clickpaths in/out are displayed. The figures on the arrows indicate the number of visits that have entered or exited via this clickpath. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clickpaths Incoming  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of incoming clickpaths. These are specific click patterns used by visitors to navigate through the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the 'Depth' drop-down menu, you can select how many steps of the clickpath are to be displayed. The maximum display is currently restricted to five steps. Clicking the visitor icon, displays a list of the last visitors with this incoming clickpath. Clicking the clickpath in the 'Clickpaths incoming' column, sorts the table in such way that the incoming clickpaths are sorted from the uppermost point of the selected path. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, at the top of the table, you will see the most frequently occurring clickpath from the selected point. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clickpaths Outgoing  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of outgoing clickpaths. These are specific click patterns the visitors use to navigate through the website before leaving it. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. Using the 'Depth' drop-down menu, you can select how many steps of the clickpath are to be displayed. The maximum display is currently restricted to five steps. Clicking the 'Clickpaths outgoing' column, sorts the table such that the outgoing clickpaths are sorted from the uppermost point of the selected path. So, at the top of the table, you will see the most frequently occurring clickpath from the selected point. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Entry Pages  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the pages a visitor used to enter the website and how long they stayed. Specifically, it shows which page, was most frequently, the first one used by visitors to the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Exit Pages  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the pages a visitor used to exit the website and how long they stayed. Specifically, it shows which page, was most frequently, the last one used by visitors before they left the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== IVW Analysis  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics provide an overview of the data passed in the ‘wm_ivw’ parameter. The time period for the overview can be selected. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visitor Engagement  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With these statistics, visitors can be assigned virtual values that measure the intensity of user interaction. The ‘Visitor Engagement’ statistics are divided into three areas. The first page you access is an overview page, which provides an overview of the profiles and folders already created. From here, you can access the analysis page and the configuration page. To access the Analysis page, select a defined profile and click “Show” button. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the configuration page, you can create new profiles or edit existing ones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To create a new profile, click the “New Profile” button, fill in the fields and click “Save”. &lt;br /&gt;
*To edit the existing profile, select a definite profile and click the “Edit” button, insert the new information into the corresponding field and click “Save”. &lt;br /&gt;
*To delete the existing profile, select a definite profile and click the “Delete” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Analysis of Visitor Engagement  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access this page, the user must first select a profile in the overview. To do this, double-click a defined profile (alternatively, right-click the profile and select ‘Show’). In these statistics, the profile is analyzed for the selected time period. The analysis is displayed over time. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings defined in the profile, such as the configured weightings for particular behavior patterns of visitors, are reflected in the ‘Visitor Engagement’ column. The KPIs displayed for the analysis likewise correspond to those selected in the profile. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overview and configuration of visitor engagement  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview page provides an overview of the profiles and folders already created and also lets the user select them for viewing. Using this page, folders and profiles can be created, edited, deleted and moved. A move is performed by using drag and drop in the tree view in the left column of the overview. To create folders and profiles, use the corresponding buttons. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or editing a profile, the user accesses the configuration page. Here, particular behavior patterns of visitors can be assigned a weight for the analysis. The profile name, a description and a category can likewise be defined here. When a category is selected, the values for the ‘Visitor Engagement Factors’ are automatically filled in accordance with this category. This ensures a standardized analysis for particular areas. Whenever you manually change a setting, the category is automatically switched to ‘Custom’. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the ‘Visitor Engagement Factors’ section, the user can define the various factors used for the analysis. The meaning of the individual settings and how they affect the analysis is explained further down. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the ‘KPIs’ section, you can choose which KPIs you want displayed for the statistics. To calculate the visitor engagement score, a formula comprising various indices is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual indices are briefly explained below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Click Depth Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits with more than the defined page impressions are counted, divided by the total number of visits and then multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Recency Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits with more than the defined page impressions that led to return visits within the defined time period are counted. The end value of this time period is always the end time of the current scale interval; to obtain the start value, the defined weeks are subtracted from the end time. The counted visits are divided by the total number of visits and multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Duration Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits with more than the defined visit time are divided by the total number of visits and then multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Loyalty Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits that led to more frequent return visits than defined are divided by the total number of visits and multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Brand Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits that landed directly on the website or through a search engine are counted, divided by the total number of visits and multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Feedback Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits that visited the defined milestone are counted, divided by the total number of visits and multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Interaction Index:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All visits that visited the defined milestone are counted, divided by the total number of visits and multiplied by the defined factor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''WMScore:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ‘wm_score’ value is totaled for the selected time period and multiplied by the defined factor. The value for ‘wm_score’ is set in the pixel-code and is stored for the respective click. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Calculation of the value displayed in the analysis:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual factor values calculated are totalled and divided by the number of activated factors. The higher the value that is calculated here, the better the analyzed time period can be classified. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that through use of the WMScore factor, the results can be disproportionately inflated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Visitors  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics under this option provide information about the origin and behavior of visitors, along with an overview of the last visitors to the website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Page Impression  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the number of page impressions for a specific period. The analysis is displayed over time. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visit Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the number of visitors to the website within a specific period. The analysis is displayed over time. The data is output in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table below shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Unique Visitors  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics provide an overview of the individual visitors to the site. Unlike with the ‘Total Visits’ analysis, how often a visitor has visited a site is irrelevant here, as only the visitors are counted. If a visitor has visited a site three times in the selected time period, this counts as one unique visit. The unique visitors always get differentiated per scale unit (days, weeks, etc.), only for the total value the complete period is used to differentiate the unique visitors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The analysis is displayed over time. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. The analysis provides an overview of the individual visitors, their visits and page impressions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. Unique visitors are visitors who can be uniquely identified. It is therefore possible to assign several visits (sessions) to a unique visitor. Here, it is important to note that unique visitors are identified via a cookie. Visitors who do not allow cookies are possibly not included in this analysis. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bounce visits  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the number of bounced visits to the website within a specific period. The time period can be freely chosen. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visitor Details  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the visitors who are currently viewing something, or who have viewed something in the past, on the website. The information is presented in tabular form and contains data about when the user visited the site, how many pages he/she viewed (PI), whether he/she visited the site in the past, and who the user identity. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the visitor is not visiting the site for the first time, a button appears in the column ‘Previous Visits’. Clicking this button displays further information on this user and his/her previous visits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Returning Visitors  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics provide an overview of whether visitors are visiting the website for the first time or have already visited it in the past. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. The returning visitors are unique visitors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PIs to Average  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of how the PI values compare with the average PI values. The average PI (page impressions) is calculated for the selected period and the individual values (e.g. hours or days) are compared with these. The results are expressed as percentages, with 0% representing the average. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits to Average  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of how the visit values compare with the average visit values. The average of the visits is calculated for the selected period and the individual values (e.g. hours or days) are compared with these. The results are expressed as percentages, with 0% representing the average. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Origin  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics for this menu item provide information about how the visitors arrived to the website and by what means. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Referrer  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the websites from which the visitors have come. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Origin Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview about the origin of the visitors. If they came directly to the website, through a search engine or through a link. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Through a click on an entry in the column '''Origin''' the statistic page which shows the data in a more detailed manner will be opened. For example, due to a click on “Search Engines” the statistic page '''Search engines''' will be opened. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search Engines  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the search engines the visitors used to land on the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search Phrases  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the search phrases visitors used to find the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using the All’, ‘Internal’ and ‘External’ option buttons, the user can select whether the search phrases of all search engines should be displayed, just those of the internal ones or just those of the external ones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To distinguish between internal and external search engines, internal search engines first have to be defined in the ‘Configuration – Internal Search’ menu. The Details ‘On’ and ‘Off’ option buttons cause search phrases that are the same but are written differently (for example, different case) to be combined or not to be combined. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Search Words  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the search words visitors used to find the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Geo-Overlay  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of continents from which the visitors originate. The information is presented in the form of a map and a table. By clicking a continent on the map, you can zoom in to see the continent's countries. By clicking one of the countries, they can zoom further in and see an overview of the regions. By clicking one of the regions, it is possible to get information about the individual cities. These are then displayed by the statistic 'Visits by city'. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The zoom function is only available for continents, countries and regions of actual visitors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits by Country  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the countries visitors to the website come from. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the Information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits by Region  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview by region of the visitor's origin. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits by City  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the cities from which visitors to the website hail. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Visits by Domain  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the domains from which visitors to the website have come. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top Providers  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of which providers the visitors use. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technology  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics under this menu item provide information about the available technological equipment of visitors to the website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Browsers  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the browsers used by visitors. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operating Systems  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the operating system visitors used. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Screen Resolutions  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the screen resolutions visitors use. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Connection speeds  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the Internet connection used by visitors to the website. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flash  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of whether visitors to the website have enabled Flash and, if so, what version. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== JavaScript  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of whether visitors to the website have enabled JavaScript and, if so, which version. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Plugins  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of which plugins the users have installed. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. The statistics data shows how many of the visitors have installed the displayed plugins. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Colors/color depth  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of what color depth visitors have configured on their computer. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Java  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of whether the user to the website has Java. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Mobile  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics under this menu item provide information about visitors which visited the website with a mobile device. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Visitors  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics provide an overview of the individual mobile visitors to the website. If a visitor has visited a site three times in the selected time period, this counts as one unique visit. The unique visitors always gets differentiated per scale unit (days, weeks, etc.), only for the total value the complete period is used to differentiate the unique visitors. The analysis is displayed over time. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. The analysis provides an overview of the individual mobile visitors, their visits and page impressions. Unique visitors are visitors who can be uniquely identified. It is therefore possible to assign several visits (sessions) to a unique visitor. Here, it is important to note that unique visitors are identified via a cookie. Visitors who do not allow cookies are possibly not included in this analysis. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Browser  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the mobile browsers used by visitors. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Operating Systems  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the mobile operating systems the visitors used. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mobile Devices  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the mobile devices the visitors used. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== E-Commerce  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics under this menu item provide information about sold items and shop sales. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Products  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the products purchased. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. They provide information on the following categories: Top Orders; Top Items (the quantity); Top sales. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information per page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics under this menu item provide an overview of the sales generated. The individual statistics can be displayed by selecting from the ‘Analysis’ dropdown list box in the ‘Selection’ panel. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the visits and the sales for the selected period. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. In the diagram, the two values are shown together using bars and a line, so that you get a good overview of the sales behavior for many and for few visits. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales per Landing Page  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the sales, the number of purchases and the average shopping basket value of visitors who have come from a particular entry page. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales per Search Phrase  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the sales and the number of visits of visitors who have come to the site using a particular search phrase. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales per Search Word  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the sales and the number of visits of visitors who have come to the site using a particular search word. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales per Payment Method  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the sales and the number of visits of visitors who have used a particular payment method. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales per Region  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the sales and the number of visits of visitors who have visited the site from a particular geographical region. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Orders  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of orders made within the selected time period. The information is presented in the form of a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the date range &lt;br /&gt;
*Click the [name] icon &lt;br /&gt;
*Call up a detail view with the page impressions and visits for the selected page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The table shows the Key Performance Indexes (KPIs) i.e. the general information on visits per page. For the individual orders, information such as the date, the visit duration, the sales and the related order number is displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Management  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page is the area where you can manage the statistics. Here users can select their favorite stats, generate reports, and create campaigns. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Management Overview  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can overview his / her web analytics. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dashboard  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The dashboard allows the user to generate a customized overview of selected statistics. To view the analytics, you should select the date range. As well as adding and displaying up to four diagrams of individual statistics, the user can define a diagram for displaying important key figures in various diagram types. Various values can also be displayed together in a combined diagram. To make these settings, click the icon located at the upper right edge of the diagram; the relevant configuration menu then opens. You can view the two types of analytics: Single matrix (see drop-down menu) and Compare matrix (see the drop=down menu). To select one of the two types, press the radio-button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can see the Visit overview analytics, visits per page, origin overview, referrers (sites which refer to user’s site) and search phrases. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== KPI’s  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics give an overview of important KPIs (Key Performance Indicators). The user can thus obtain important key figures on the visit behavior of their website visitors at a glance. To view the statistics, select the date range. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Favorites  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item lists the individual favorite statistics. It also gives the possibility to edit them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overview]]  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview and management functionalities for the saved favorites. It is possible to delete or edit favorites by selecting them from the list. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view the information on the selected item by clicking “Show” icon; edit the information by pressing “Edit” icon and delete the item by pressing “Delete” icon. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Campaigns  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics under this menu item provide information about campaigns and milestones on the website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Campaigns Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All campaigns created are located into the folders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new campaign: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder to which the new campaign will be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “New Campaign”. &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the necessary fields. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new folder: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder to which the new folder will be placed &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the new folder’s name. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information on any campaign: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder in which the needed campaign is located &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Show'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information on a campaign created: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the desired profile. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Correct the information in the given fields. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top Campaigns  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the campaigns in the selected period. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. To view the information, select a date range. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top Milestones  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the defined milestones and how many visitors have reached these. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. To view the information, select a date range. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales per Campaign  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics provide an overview of the visits and the sales for the individual campaigns in the selected time period. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. In the diagram, the sales and the number of visits are shown together using bars and a line, so that you can easily compare the benefit of one campaign over another. To view the information, select a date range. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Conversion  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversions created are located into the folders. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new campaign: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder to which the new conversion will be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''New Conversion'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the necessary fields. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new folder: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder to which the new folder will be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the new folder’s name. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information on any conversion: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder in which the needed conversion is located &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Show'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information on a conversion created: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the desired profile. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Correct the information in the given fields. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reports  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pages under this menu item provide an overview of already created report configurations and allow you to download the reports previously generated. The report configurations can also be created, edited and deleted here. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Report Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview page provides an overview of the report configurations and folders already created, and lets you select them in the tree view. Youcan select a profile to get a report on it and download the report to the PC. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Create New Reports  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This site provides the possibility to create new reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create new report: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a folder to which this new report will be located. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create new report''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the fields. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new folder: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a folder in which the new folder will be located. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New folder''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the new folder’s name. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To edit the information about the item: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the item &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the offered fields &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete an item: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an item. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Confirm deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create and download the report: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a folder in which the new report will be located. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create and download''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the necessary fields. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Save'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Advanced  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page will allow a user to view and create certain statistics. The statistics that the user can view in this section include: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Instant Lead Generator  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics and pages for this menu item provide information on companies that have visited the website or certain milestones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Notifications Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Notifications Overview provides an Overview of all Notifications. Here it is possible to take a look at the existing Notifications, edit or delete them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== New Email Notification  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page gives the user the option of carrying out settings to enable the automatic sending of email notifications (to one or several e-mail addresses). This ensures that they are notified as soon as a (specific) company has visited a specific area or milestone of their website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the new notification: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the folder in which the notification will be located. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “New notification”. &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the offered fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to create a notification, several inputs are required. In the field “notification-name” correspondent names for the notifications can be assigned. In the field “status” the user can configure if a notification will be sent.(active = notification will be sent, inactive = notification will not be sent).The user can also choose a language for your notification. Notifications will be sent to one or several e-mail addresses. Every e-mail address has to be separated by comma. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the fields “e-mail Subject” and “E-mail bodytext” text can be written, which will be sent in the e-mail. The user can insert one or several companies in the field “Companies”. The Button “Add Selection” adds a new edit line. In order to delete one or several companies, just click the Button “Remove”. The Areas or milestone, for which the notifications will be sent, can be chosen in the corresponding fields. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the field “Creation-Interval” you can configure if the notification will be sent to them instantly or daily. Fields marked with an asterisk (*), are mandatory fields. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click “Save”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Companies Online  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides a chronological overview of the companies which are currently online on the website. Furthermore it provides the same functionality as the statistic 'Company Visits Chronolog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Company Visits Chronolog  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As well as providing a chronological overview of the companies that have visited the website, this page allows the user to purchase further information about these companies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information, select the date range. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. The table contains information on whether the companies had already previously visited the website, how long they stayed on the website and how many page impressions (PI) they made. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Companies overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides a complete overview, sorted by visits, of the companies that have visited the website. To view the information, select the date range. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. The table contains &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Companies by branch  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides a complete overview of the branches from the companies which visited the website. To view the information, select the date range. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Companies by size  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides a complete overview of the size of the companies which visited the website. To view the information, select the date range. The information is presented in the form of a diagram or a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Company Geo-Overlay  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides an overview of the origin from the companies which visited the website. To view the information, select the date range. The information is presented in the form of a map and a table. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking in the map it is possible to zoom deeper into detail and get an overview about the countries, regions and cities from where the companies originate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Overlay/Heatmap  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The statistics for this menu item provide the functionality to do a heatmap- and overlay analysis on the website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overlay/Heatmap  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This analysis opens your website and allows you to apply an overlay or a heatmap analysis to it. When the page is open, a popup dialog appears, showing the current settings (such as time period, filter, etc.) for the analysis. In this popup window, you can also select the form of analysis, in other words, whether they want to apply an overlay or a heatmap analysis to the website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The two analyses are briefly described below: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overlay analysis  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This visualization feature is a function that is placed like a slide over the website to display the usage behavior graphically on the page. With the overlay analysis, the usage frequency of active elements such as forms, links or buttons is displayed as a transparent overlay of graphics or text directly on the website. This tool lets the user see at a glance, for example, which links are less appealing to visitors and what impact changes in navigation have on user behavior. This innovative visualization tool is an ideal addition to workflow analyses and visitor questionnaires and replaces expensive and time-consuming usability studies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Heatmap Analysis  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This visualization feature is a function that is placed like a slide over the website to display the usage behavior graphically on the page. But unlike with the overlay analysis, a heatmap of clicks is displayed here, which lets the user find out the most-clicked locations on the web page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful in two respects: to get an overview of the clicks for active elements such as forms, links or buttons, but also to get an overview of non-dynamic elements. This could be useful to identify which non-active elements visitors clicked particularly frequently – for example, a graphic which was mistaken for a link. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Statistic Comparison  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This statistics under this menu item let you compare data and statistics. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Comparison  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides a comparison for two sets of statistics. On the one hand, they can compare the same statistic with different periods. (e.g. Visitors of a particular day with the visitors of the previous day or previous week.) On the other hand, they can compare two statistics of a different type. Thus, it is possible to compare the visitors of a region with the visitors of a country. Additionally you can compare the visits of different areas of a website. They have to choose the statistics for comparison, which shall be analyzed. Afterwards they can choose the wanted period in the calendar. Optionally different settings can be done in the segmentation panel. The data can be presented in the form of a diagram or a table. The user can switch between the various views using the ‘Chart’ and ‘Table’ tabs. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Individual Statistics  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Site ‘Individual statistics’ provides the possibility to create and edit own statistics. It is possible to include unique requirements to your self-made statistic. (e.g. weather information, Information about languages, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overview  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The individual Statistic provides the possibility to create any number of statistics and customize them to your personal needs. The user now has the ability to generate new parameters in the pixel-code and not only make use of fixed parameters. On the Side Overview, new individual statistics can be created and existing ones can be edited or deleted. (Except the not deletable, predefined parameters wm_visit1; wm_visit_2; and wm_click1;). The parameter has to be named in the way it is described in “Create new individual statistics”. A click on the Pixel-Button ( ) calls up the correspondent code. The statistic configuration can (if wished) be activated only for the administrator. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FTP Credentials  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can enter FTP login credentials in order to connect to the webspace for installation individual statistics. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3D/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3D4.3.2.3._Create_new_individual_statistics%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;new&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php?title=4.3.2.3. Create new individual statistics&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1 (page does not exist)&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;RTENOTITLE&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create an individual statistic: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click on the Button “Add new statistic”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A dialog displays the individual statistic can be created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the upper box “statistic name” the name of the statistic will be inserted. This can also be translated to other languages, if the application is used multilingual. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Choose the parameter type. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It differs between click-based and visit-based statistics. Thus realizes statistics, which are displaying additional information with every click. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The visit-based parameter allows the collection of additional values, but only the one of the last click of the visitor. E.g.: Visualization, if a Visitor was logged in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. This step completes every parameter, which will later be inserted in the area “own parameters”. The Parameter must be completed with integers. E.g. „wm_indiv_stats.wm_click_1“. The generated Code can be called up with a click on the Pixel-Button ( ) and then copied for the installation in the pixel-code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Now, an additional Explanation can be applied for every particular statistic, which will be displayed in the statistic side by clicking the light bulb icon. This text can also be applied in different languages like the statistic name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Pixel-Code  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to turn on or off the Pixel-code within the source code of the website. Once the user has enable the Pixel-Code an additional piece of code wil appear in the source code of the users website. In the case of the Pixel-Code being disabled, there will be no additonal pieces of code but the customers stats will also stop tracking. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Settings  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to configure the application and personal account, as well as add and edit users, groups and customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu item contains tabs for configuring the application, the own account and for installing the pixel-code. This page allows you to apply general settings for the count server. There is also an option of setting cookies for visitors in order to better identify returning customers. You can also set a cookie for yourself, so as not to be counted. If you do not want visits from particular IP addresses to be counted, you can exclude them by specifying these IP addresses. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete Data  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you can delete stored data. You can delete either all collected data or only data of a specific period. Warning: Deleted data cannot be recovered! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Internal Search  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page allows you to configure an internal search. If an internal search has been configured, it can be hidden/shown on the ‘Search engines’ page by using the option buttons. Information on setting up the internal search may be found directly on the ‘Internal Search’ page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pixel-Code  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page lets a user download a ready-made customized pixel-code for the logged-in account. Here, a distinction is made between non-Flash and Flash-based web pages. For detailed instructions on how to integrate the available code, see ‘Integrating the pixel-code’. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Additional Parameters  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides information on additional configuration options of the pixel-code. Detailed instructions may be found under ‘Integrating the pixel-code’. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== FTP Credentials  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your FTP login credentials in order to connect to your webspace. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Install/Uninstall the Additional Parameters  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can Install/Uninstall the additional parameters to/from your files and folders you would like/you would not like to be tracked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3D/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3DManually_Setting_Page_and_Group_Name%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;new&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php?title=Manually Setting Page and Group Name&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1 (page does not exist)&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;RTENOTITLE&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Analytics counting code automatically infers the name and group of a web page from the URL. However, you can instead set own names for each page and page group. You may install and configure the Manually Setting Page and Group Name feature via this section. If you set own page or group names, we recommend that you use short and informative terms. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They should contain information about the page/area in which you are currently located (for example, login or index.html). Several other information like country and language can also be added, if required. The name may not contain empty spaces and the information must be separated by '|' for wm_page_name and '/' for wm_group_name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to use special characters, these characters need to be URL-encoded in the noscript part of the pixel code. For example, use '+' instead of spaces and '%E4' instead of 'ä' etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3D/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3DCampaign_Tracking%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;new&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php?title=Campaign Tracking&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1 (page does not exist)&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;RTENOTITLE&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Analytics, you can measure the effectiveness of your online advertising campaigns. You may install and configure this feature via the Campaign Tracking section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see for example which banner ad your visitor clicked on to reach your site, please add a parameter to the link from the banner to your site. The parameter should look like this:&amp;amp;nbsp;?campaign_id=KAMPAGNENNAME &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Replace &amp;quot;MY_CAMPAIGN&amp;quot; by a word that helps you to identify your ad campaign. You can identify different campaigns by choosing as many different words as you like.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, you need to tell the counting code what parameter to watch and report. You can do this by adding the line wm_campaign_key=&amp;quot;campaign_id&amp;quot; to the counting code between the lines &amp;quot;// Begin own parameters.&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;// End own parameters.&amp;quot; If you are already tracking your campaigns with a different parameter in the URL, you can use this parameter instead of &amp;quot;campaign_id&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other Additional Parameters  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Obtain the help files related to other additional features that can not be installed automatically but can be installed manually. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Flashpixel'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides information on integrating the pixel-code into Flash-based websites. For detailed instructions on how to integrate the available code, see ‘Integrating the pixel-code’. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''A/B Test'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These statistics allow a user to create an A/B test for visits and milestone visits. A/B testing is a way of running alternatives against each other to see which gives the better result. As well as carrying out the technical implementation, it is essential to clearly formulate the alternatives and the success criteria, and to then act accordingly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, two things are key to successful implementation: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Alternatives are compared that differ in one characteristic (for example, the text of a banner). &lt;br /&gt;
#The success criterion is clearly established (for example, alternative A achieves a higher click rate than alternative B).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A/B tests can be used for virtually all contents of a website, for example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Phrasing/wording, texts or labels &lt;br /&gt;
*Pricing, costs and terms of shipping, returns and service offers &lt;br /&gt;
*Navigation (arrangement or sequence) &lt;br /&gt;
*Graphical design (colors, shapes, size proportions, positioning) &lt;br /&gt;
*Specific functions (PDF downloads, print version, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Milestone-Tracking'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Analytics you can set your own milestones at important places of your website and generate special analysis (e.g. a funnel-analysis) with it. To do this, you have to add a new line between the lines &amp;quot;// Begin own parameters.&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;// End own parameters.&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This line could look like this: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
wm_milestone=&amp;quot;Milestonename&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you just have to replace &amp;quot;Milestonename&amp;quot; with a name chosen from you. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Tracking of File Downloads'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With Analytics, you are not only able to track websites, you can also track file downloads, outbound links or any other event on the website. To do this, the counting-code must be integrated in the same website as the download link. The following onClick-event should be added to the download link (or to events like: onClick, onMouseOver, etc.): &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
onClick=&amp;quot;wiredminds.count('Filename.Fileformat')&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title of the file can be chosen freely. Please assure to append the filetype. If the link is no download but an outgoing link, of course no filetype is required. Further information can be also found in the online-help sites. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Tracking Events'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pixel-code makes it possible to track various events triggered by a user. An event is not regarded as a normal page impression, but can be used for different kinds of actions (for example, the playing of a movie). Through special statistics such as &amp;quot;Events&amp;quot;, the data thus tracked can be analyze. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the event is executed, the function wiredminds.trackEvent('EventName') must be called up. In the case of a simple link, this can be implemented using an &amp;quot;onClick&amp;quot; event, for example. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
onClick=&amp;quot;wiredminds.trackEvent('Movies/Action/Movie1/PlayMovie') &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that hierarchical categories can also be set using the name. This is done using the &amp;quot;/&amp;quot; separator. If the name of the event were &amp;quot;Movies/Action/Movie1/PlayMovie&amp;quot;, the &amp;quot;PlayMovie&amp;quot; event would be located at the lowest level of the &amp;quot;Movies-&amp;amp;gt;Action-&amp;amp;gt;Movie1&amp;quot; hierarchy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3D/en/index.php%3Ftitle%3D5.1.5._Settings_for_data_protection%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1%26action%3Dedit%26redlink%3D1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;new&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;/en/index.php?title=/en/index.php?title=5.1.5. Settings for data protection&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1&amp;amp;amp;action=edit&amp;amp;amp;redlink=1 (page does not exist)&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;RTENOTITLE&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page provides possibilities to apply settings for the data protection. According to the applied settings, the web analysis can be used compliant to data protection law or not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this, different settings can be applied. Therefore, it is possible for visitors to the website the possibility to exclude themselves from tracking. To do this, a code is offered which brings this functionality. Further information can be found at 'Grant visitors the possibility to exclude themselves from being tracked'. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, settings can be applied if the IP address of a visitor should be saved partially or not at all(which is compliant to data protection law), or to store the entire IP address (which isn’t compliant to data protection law). Additionally, settings can be made for using he IP address for geo localization or for the recognition of returning visitors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By clicking the '''Support''' button, you can access support on how to use the Analytics application. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Feedback  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also the “Feedback” button, providing a user with the opportunity to leave a feedback. To do this: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a type of feedback from the drop-down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#To be contacted regarding his / her feedback, select the checkbox ‘I would like to be contacted about my feedback.’ &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the text into the text field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Submit Feedback” button. &lt;br /&gt;
#To cancel the actions mentioned above, click the “Cancel” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a _fcknotitle=&amp;quot;true&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;Category:Marketing&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Marketing&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=797</id>
		<title>Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=797"/>
				<updated>2014-04-07T15:31:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Intro =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your Control Panel! Once you sign in you will have access to all of our new applications to help you create the business website you want! Whether you want to create a social campaign, a mobile website or a business card we can help. The Control Panel offers you a variety of options which you can access from the easy to use home page! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cplogin.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Services=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The  My Services section is where you will begin to build your businesses website. Here you can access all the services you have purchased, view your emails, see how much storage you have left and manage your domains. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;[[Image:Cphome.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage your Account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your account information, credit card info or to see what services you have purchased click Mange Your Account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Accountinfo.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For quick info take a look at the Control Panel tips on the right side of the Home Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Tips.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current Domain  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Current Domain feature allows you to change which domain you are working on, by selecting an option from the drop down menu. Once you have chosen the domain you want, all the work you do with the applications will appear on that chosen website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Currentdomain.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Shop =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Shop section is your go to place for all services you may need to make your business successful online. You can purchase many different services from hosting packages to mobile services or social tools. Everything you need to create a great website can be bought here! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Shop.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Support =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support section provides you with information for billing, emails, domains, websites, design services and more! You can view our FAQ about specific services or even type in a question in our search bar! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Support.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support Messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can’t find what you are looking for? You may contact us for additional support through live chat, email or phone. Your message will be answered and displayed in the Message Center. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Contactus.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=796</id>
		<title>Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=796"/>
				<updated>2014-04-07T15:27:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Intro =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your Control Panel! Once you sign in you will have access to all of our new applications to help you create the business website you want! Whether you want to create a social campaign, a mobile website or a business card we can help. The Control Panel offers you a variety of options which you can access from the easy to use home page! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cplogin.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Services=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Services section is where you will begin to build your businesses website. Here you can access all the services you have purchased, view your emails, see how much storage you have left and manage your domains. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;[[Image:Cphome.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage your Account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your account information, credit card info or to see what services you have purchased click Mange Your Account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Accountinfo.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For quick info take a look at the Control Panel tips on the right side of the Home Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Tips.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current Domain  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Current Domain feature allows you to change which domain you are working on, by selecting an option from the drop down menu. Once you have chosen the domain you want, all the work you do with the applications will appear on that chosen website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Currentdomain.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Shop =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Shop section is your go to place for all services you may need to make your business successful online. You can purchase many different services from hosting packages to mobile services or social tools. Everything you need to create a great website can be bought here! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Shop.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Support =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support section provides you with information for billing, emails, domains, websites, design services and more! You can view our FAQ about specific services or even type in a question in our search bar! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Support.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support Messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can’t find what you are looking for? You may contact us for additional support through live chat, email or phone. Your message will be answered and displayed in the Message Center. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Contactus.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=795</id>
		<title>Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=795"/>
				<updated>2014-04-07T15:25:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Intro =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your Control Panel! Once you sign in you will have access to all of our new applications to help you create the business website you want! Whether you want to create a social campaign, a mobile website or a business card we can help. The Control Panel offers you a variety of options which you can access from the easy to use home page! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cplogin.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Home =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Home page gives you quick access to everything you need to get started! You can view all your recent activity and newly purchased items in the Home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;[[Image:Cphome.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage your Account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your account information, credit card info or to see what services you have purchased click Mange Your Account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Accountinfo.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For quick info take a look at the Control Panel tips on the right side of the Home Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Tips.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Services =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Start Services section is where you will begin to build your businesses website. Here you can access all the services you have purchased, view your emails, see how much storage you have left and manage your domains. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current Domain  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Current Domain feature allows you to change which domain you are working on, by selecting an option from the drop down menu. Once you have chosen the domain you want, all the work you do with the applications will appear on that chosen website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Currentdomain.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Shop =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Shop section is your go to place for all services you may need to make your business successful online. You can purchase many different services from hosting packages to mobile services or social tools. Everything you need to create a great website can be bought here! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Shop.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Support =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support section provides you with information for billing, emails, domains, websites, design services and more! You can view our FAQ about specific services or even type in a question in our search bar! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Support.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support Messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can’t find what you are looking for? You may contact us for additional support through live chat, email or phone. Your message will be answered and displayed in the Message Center. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[Image:Contactus.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=794</id>
		<title>Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=794"/>
				<updated>2014-04-07T15:21:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Intro =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your Control Panel! Once you sign in you will have access to all of our new applications to help you create the business website you want! Whether you want to create a social campaign, a mobile website or a business card we can help. The Control Panel offers you a variety of options which you can access from the easy to use home page! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Cplogin.PNG|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Home =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Home page gives you quick access to everything you need to get started! You can view all your recent activity and newly purchased items in the Home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Cphome.PNG|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage your Account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change your account information, credit card info or to see what services you have purchased click Mange Your Account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[/en/index.php/File:Accountinfo.png|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For quick info take a look at the Control Panel tips on the right side of the Home Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Tips.jpg|[[Image:|Tips.jpg]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= My Services =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Start Services section is where you will begin to build your businesses website. Here you can access all the services you have purchased, view your emails, see how much storage you have left and manage your domains. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Current Domain  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Current Domain feature allows you to change which domain you are working on, by selecting an option from the drop down menu. Once you have chosen the domain you want, all the work you do with the applications will appear on that chosen website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Currentdomain.PNG|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Shop =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Shop section is your go to place for all services you may need to make your business successful online. You can purchase many different services from hosting packages to mobile services or social tools. Everything you need to create a great website can be bought here! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Shop.PNG|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Support =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Support section provides you with information for billing, emails, domains, websites, design services and more! You can view our FAQ about specific services or even type in a question in our search bar! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Support.PNG|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Support Messages ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Can’t find what you are looking for? You may contact us for additional support through live chat, email or phone. Your message will be answered and displayed in the Message Center. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; [[/en/index.php/File:Contactus.PNG|[[Image:|RTENOTITLE]]]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=PhpMyAdmin&amp;diff=793</id>
		<title>PhpMyAdmin</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=PhpMyAdmin&amp;diff=793"/>
				<updated>2014-02-21T16:23:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
phpMyAdmin is a PHP tool, designed to handle the administration of MySQL databases using a web browser interface. It can create and drop databases, create/drop/alter tables, delete/edit/add fields, execute any SQL statement, manage keys on fields, manage privileges and export data into various formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The phpMyAdmin application is an installation program which will allow you to quickly and easily install phpMyAdmin for use on your website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Overview.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Install phpMyAdmin =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To begin you must install phpMyAdmin onto your website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation Directory ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To install phpMyAdmin please follow these directions. 1.Select or create a directory on your website to install phpMyAdmin. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can select a directory path form the list provided (e.g. /public/adirectory/).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
OR &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also create a new directory under a given path using the second text box provided at the bottom of the interface.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, if you want to create a /phpmyadmin/ directory under /public, select /public from the list, then in the second textbox at the bottom, type &amp;quot;phpmyadmin&amp;quot; and click the '''Create''' button. This will create a directory called /phpmyadmin/ under /public. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Once you have selected an installation directory that is acceptable to you, click '''Next''' towards the top-right corner of the app to continue to the next step. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Directory.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Database information ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You must have a database installed on your website. If you do not: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked to create a database password &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a password &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a database user and database installed on your site you can: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the database username and database which phpMyAdmn will work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Please note: You must already have both these set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a database and database username with the Database Manager application. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using the dropdown lists, select a database username, then you select a database from the second drop-down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*Click '''Next''' towards the top-right corner of the interface to continue to the next step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Info.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; '''*Please Note: You will need your password to uninstall phpMyAdmin''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Administration Interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use phpMyAdmin you must have a username and password combination. You will have to fill out all fields. Click '''Next''' when completed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Admin.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Installation Complete ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your installation has completed. Here you can view the data. Click Next to complete the installation. You can then either exit or go to your phpMyAdmin. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Installationcomplete.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Uninstall =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To uninstall phpMyAdmin: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter '''Password''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Confirm you want to uninstall by pressing '''Yes''' or '''No'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Uninstall.PNG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Change Password =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is where you can change the password for your phpMyAdmin login screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your username &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter new password &lt;br /&gt;
#Confirm new password &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note:''' the password you are changing is the one you use to log in to phpMyAdmin, which can be accessed by clicking on the '''Go to phpMyAdmin''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Changepassword.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Go to phpMyADMIN=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking this option will open your phpMyAdmin login screen in a new browser window. Enter the '''username''' and '''password''' you used to create your phpMyAdmin. This will allow you to use your database web application.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Login.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have logged in you will have access to phpMyadmin where you can: &lt;br /&gt;
*Create tables &lt;br /&gt;
*Edit any work&lt;br /&gt;
*View your databases&lt;br /&gt;
*Import and Export data and plenty more! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File: Php.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasySiteWizardPro&amp;diff=792</id>
		<title>EasySiteWizardPro</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasySiteWizardPro&amp;diff=792"/>
				<updated>2014-02-20T20:00:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EasySiteWizard Pro will allow you to create a completely customized website in a few simple steps. There are several creative and modern designs available for you choose from. Each design can be personalized by uploading your own images or by selecting from the vast free image library. EasySiteWizard Pro allows you to drag and drop your way to a professional online presence, without any knowledge of HTML. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EasySiteWizard Pro is compatible with the following web browsers: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Internet Explorer 7 &lt;br /&gt;
*Firefox &lt;br /&gt;
*Internet Explorer 6&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The EasySiteWizard Pro website management and design process is broken down into the following steps: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Sites &lt;br /&gt;
*Designs &lt;br /&gt;
*Editor &lt;br /&gt;
*Preview &lt;br /&gt;
*Publish &lt;br /&gt;
*Tutorial &lt;br /&gt;
*Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CP_Overview.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Main Menu= &lt;br /&gt;
The main menu is located on the top right corner of EasySiteWizard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Main Menu: Links you to the Main Page of EasySiteWizard Pro 8.3&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Create New Site:''' Allows you to create new site.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Manage Sites:''' Allows you to publish/edit/delete the site.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Support:''' Opens online help files for EasySiteWizard Pro 8.3 in a new window.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Feedback:''' This option allows you to send a feedback concerning EasySiteWizard Pro 8.3&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tutorial:''' A flash demo will be presented to the user upon how to use the application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ESW_Main_Menu.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Create New Site=&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the “Create New Site” button. &lt;br /&gt;
#You will find the two options: Landing Page which allows you creating a basic site with a single page and Multi-page site which allows you to create site with multiple pages and options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Website_type.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Landing Page=&lt;br /&gt;
A landing page is a single web page also known as a lead capture page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Designs== &lt;br /&gt;
In this step, you can select a layout template for your site. To select a template:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Scroll through the list of thumbnails to the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Design.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.When you find a template that is to your liking, click on it. Your selected template will open in a new window together with the color scheme which you can use to modify the color of your template.&lt;br /&gt;
3.When ready click on Apply and a checkmark will be overlaid on top, indicating that the template has been selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Design_Options.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' In order to change the background color of a template you must select the Blank template category from the list of categories and proceed to the editor section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Click Next to proceed to the Editor, where you can begin to customize the design and content of the template, or:&lt;br /&gt;
*Click Back to return to the Sites step.&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on any of the other steps listed at the top of the screen to skip directly to that step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Site Details===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the following site details : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Company Name:''' the name of your company as it will be shown on your website's main page &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Company description:''' insert your company’s description &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Site URL:''' this is the URL where people will be able to view your site when it is published &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Publish To (directory):''' if you do not want to publish your webpage to the main directory (e.g. http://www.mydomain.com/), you can specify a subdirectory, such as http://www.mydomain.com/anotherdirectory/ &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Enable syndication (RSS 2.0, Atom 1.0)''': enabling this option will allow people to know when you have updated your website via RSS &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Phone number:''' you should indicate your contact phone number. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Toll free number''': you should indicate your toll free number &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Address:''' the address at which your company locates &lt;br /&gt;
*'''City:''' the city where your company locates &lt;br /&gt;
*'''State/Province:''' state or province where your company locates &lt;br /&gt;
*'''ZIP / Postal Code:''' you should indicate the ZIP / Postal Code of the region your company locates at.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Email address:''' you should indicate the email address of the site’s owner. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Contact Us Form:''' select whether your site will contain “Contact Us Form” or not. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Google Map:''' select whether your site will contain the link to Google Map indicating your company’s location or not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Site_Details.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editor==&lt;br /&gt;
The editor allows you to edit every element in your template. By default, '''filler text''', also known as '''Greeking''', has been supplied in order for you to get a feel for what the template might look like with content added. You can modify or delete any of the existing graphics or text as you wish. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following options are available in the editor: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Save:''' saves any changes you have made to the current page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be prompted with a drop down menu with four options: '''save page''', '''restore from autosave''', '''restore from backup '''and '''save a master'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When switching from one page to the next, EasySiteWizard Pro 7 will automatically save work done. The user is being able to go back and forth in time for saved sites. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Add page:''' opens the page manager interface, allowing you to add, remove or rename pages on your website. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Add textblock:''' creates a new box on the screen, which you can use to enter text. This box can be moved or resized.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Add table:''' creates a table on the screen. Table can be moved and you can add or remove columns and rows as well as you can resize your table&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Add image:''' opens the image library interface, allowing you to upload a picture from your computer, or select one from our free image library. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Undo:''' undoes your last action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Redo:''' redoes your last action (re-applies your last undo) &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Bold, Italics, Underline, font properties:''' these controls allow you to format text in your textblocks. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Hyperlink:''' make highlighted text link to a URL. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Bulleted list:''' create a bulleted list in a textblock. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Create heading:''' designates text selected in a textblock as a heading; Adds stylistic markers (determined by the template you selected) indicating that the text is a heading. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Spellcheck:''' checks the spelling in any textblock currently open for editing. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Create web form:''' opens the web form creation interface. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Add a widget:''' You can add widgets to your page (Google map, BT Tradespace) &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Edit the source code:''' Let's you edit either the HTML code, CSS code or edit the Metadata. The chosen code will open in a new window where you can make all the changes you want. This section is recommended for more advanced users who prefer to make changes to their sites by editing the source code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Moving Objects within your Site===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Left click and hold the object (i.e. Image, Text Block) you wish to move. &lt;br /&gt;
#A grid overlay will appear, in order to assist you in aligning the object you are moving. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move your mouse to the desired location. &lt;br /&gt;
#Unclick. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[File:Moveobjects.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Menu Editor==&lt;br /&gt;
The menu editor allows you to modify your website's navigation bar (usually found at the left-hand side of your template). You can use the menu editor to add, remove or rename menu and submenu buttons. It is also possible to move the navigation bar to a different location on the template.&lt;br /&gt;
To move your navigation bar, click and drag the menu editor bar at the top of the navigation menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Vertical/Horizontal menu orientation===&lt;br /&gt;
#In order to change the menu orientation (vertical/horizontal), in the editor section select Edit site menu.&lt;br /&gt;
#A new window will open where the user can choose to display the menu vertical or horizontal by selecting the appropriate radio button.&lt;br /&gt;
#To manually adjust the width of the Menu enter a value in pixels or use auto option to apply automatic value.&lt;br /&gt;
#You may choose to manually adjust the width of a single Menu item by entering a value in pixels. Choosing auto option will apply automatic value to each button, depending on the length of the button name.&lt;br /&gt;
#When done click Apply for the changes to take effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Wizard Completed==&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done adding your changes to your website press the '''Next''' button to save changes. This screen offers you the following options:&lt;br /&gt;
*Preview your website;&lt;br /&gt;
*Publish your website (if you would like to make your website publicly available);&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to Manage Sites;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go back to Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
To return to Main Menu press the '''Cancel''' button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Multi Page Site=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the new site in Multi-page site take the following steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Design==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the design you would like to use as the starting point for your website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Design.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then click on the one you want to use. The design will enlarge, and you will then be able to select the design or select another design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Previewtemplate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Favourites=== &lt;br /&gt;
Using the '''Add to Favorites''' button you can add a template to your &amp;quot;Favorites&amp;quot;; this is an easy way to organize and choose between a smaller selection of templates that you like. You will be able to view Favorites section by clicking the sign.&lt;br /&gt;
Some templates are available in more than one color scheme. Click the color buttons to select a general color scheme.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Search Function===&lt;br /&gt;
You can also search for a template within the selected design category by entering a keyword or the corresponding template ID. You may also search for a template within all the design categories by selecting the '''all designs''' option from the drop down menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site Details== &lt;br /&gt;
Fill out the following details for your website:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Site Title:''' This is the name of your website, as it will appear on your website's main page. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Tagline:''' This is a secondary text line which appears immediately underneath the website title. This section can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Site URL:''' This is the URL where people will be able to view your site when it is published. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Publish To (directory):''' If you do not want to publish your webpage to the main directory (e.g. http://www.mydomain.com/), you can specify a subdirectory, e.g. http://www.mydomain.com/anotherdirectory/ &lt;br /&gt;
*Enable syndication (RSS 2.0, Atom 1.0): Enabling this option will allow people to know when you have updated your website via RSS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[File:Multidetails.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site Menu== &lt;br /&gt;
Having selected the design you want to work with press “Apply” to create your site menu. The following screen will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Site_map.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Menu Buttons=== &lt;br /&gt;
Main buttons are utilized for the initial topic or subject of the site. Generally used as a focal point of what items are most important in the navigation (i.e. Home, Contact Us, Furniture etc.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Subcategory Buttons=== &lt;br /&gt;
As the navigation branches off subcategories become available. This allows you to go into detail about the particular topic or subject. (i.e. Main Category: Furniture =&amp;gt; Subcategory: Chairs, Couches, Tables, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a Main Category/Subcategory Button===&lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Menu editor”&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the button&lt;br /&gt;
#In Button Properties, label the button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Button_Properties.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Label Hover Tooltip&lt;br /&gt;
5.Select “Link to” and click Page (drop down menu will appear to select pages within your site)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Linkto.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
URL, Blog, Store, Chat, Email, and Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
6. Check “Open in a new Window” if you wish the button to open a new browser.&lt;br /&gt;
7. Click “Apply”/“Cancel” to accept/dismiss changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Deleting a Button===&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Button you wish to delete&lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Delete this button.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Edit Your Site===&lt;br /&gt;
Please see the edit your site section for the landing page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Manage Sites=&lt;br /&gt;
This section contains the sites you will be able to work with. If you would like to create a new site, click the Create New Site button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mange_Sites.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Under this section you will be able to edit site details, choose new designs for your site, close/delete site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mange_sites_details.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mentioned features will be described below, under the Editor Section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to create a new site, click the button. To edit your site, click the button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editor Section==&lt;br /&gt;
The Editor Section allows you to edit, manage and modify the design you have selected. Editor allows you to “Save page”, “Add a text block”, “Add a table”, “Add an image”, “Redo/Undo” actions, “Create a hyperlink to another page or site”, “Create a bulleted list”, “Create a heading”, “Check spelling,” “Create a web form” and add a Google Map to your page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site Menu Editor== &lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to set properties for individual buttons of the site (font, background, button border, padding of text inside the button, button margin). A Preview feature was also added to the Site Menu Editor, so you can see the changes of properties on the fly without having to exit the Menu Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit_site_menu.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Preview panel===&lt;br /&gt;
Site buttons preview is added to easily review changes made without exiting Site Menu Editor every time properties are changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Apply settings to all''' buttons feature will be checked by default. It allows you to apply same parameters for all buttons at once. If unchecked – buttons can be configured separately.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the '''Apply settings to all buttons''' checkbox in order to apply all the changes to all buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply''' in order to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Buttons dimensions option===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to set button dimensions. You can modify button height and width. Both are set in pixels.&lt;br /&gt;
1. Enter the number of pixels desired in the provided boxes for both the height and the width of a button.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click “Apply” in order to save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Button Border option===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to set border dimensions to a particular site button. Pressing the respective button calls a pop-up menu. User can configure three parameters of button border – style, thickness and color.&lt;br /&gt;
#In order to set the border of a button click the button located next to the “Button Border” section.&lt;br /&gt;
#A border button menu pop up will open where you can set the border style, thickness and color of the button. While setting these parameters you will be able to see a border preview on the right side of the pop-up menu. Use the drop down menus to select a border style and thickness. For choosing a color click on color picker and a color palette will open from where you will be able to choose a color for the button border.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click '''Apply/Cancel''' to save/dismiss all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Interior Padding option===&lt;br /&gt;
Option to set interior padding of the button. Pressing the respective button calls a pop-up menu. You can adjust top, bottom, left and right parameters.&lt;br /&gt;
#In order to set the interior padding of a button click the button located next to the '''Interior Padding''' section.&lt;br /&gt;
#The Interior padding menu pop up will open where you can set/adjust the top, left, bottom and right parameters of a button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply/Cancel''' to save/dismiss all the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Button Margin option=== &lt;br /&gt;
Option to set margin of the button. Pressing the respective button calls a pop-up menu. You can adjust top, bottom, left and right parameters. &lt;br /&gt;
#In order to set the margins of a button click the button located next to the “Button Margin” section. &lt;br /&gt;
#The Button Margin menu pop up will open where you can set/adjust the top, left, bottom and right margins of a button. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply/Cancel''' to save/dismiss all the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to save your website=== &lt;br /&gt;
Saving your work is recommended throughout your session of EasySiteWizard Pro Please take the following steps to save your website changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the save button.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be prompted with a drop down menu with four saving options: “save page”, “restore from auto save”, “restore from backup” and “save as template”.&lt;br /&gt;
#It is recommended that you save every page that is modified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note:&lt;br /&gt;
*When switching from one page to the next, EasySiteWizard Pro will automatically save work done. You have the ability to switch between saved sites.&lt;br /&gt;
*You can review roll back/ roll forward changes per web page (every version is saved with date/time so that can be selected) - There is a history kept of each save. When you save your website site (this is the current save the one that would be published). The previous save would then be put in a directory, as a backup, which could then be restored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Master Page Enhancements==&lt;br /&gt;
This feature implies the inability to edit master page elements when on ordinary pages (Home, News, etc.), hence site title, tag line, menu editor are only editable on Master Page.&lt;br /&gt;
The Master Page elements are dimmed when viewing ordinary pages.&lt;br /&gt;
Choose create a New Site within the “Sites” section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a design to be used for your website form within the “Designs” section.&lt;br /&gt;
#When you proceed to the “Editor” section you will be prompted with a message asking whether you would like to configure Master Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Master_Page.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should note that all changes applied to your master page will be visible when previewing or publishing your final site. &lt;br /&gt;
3.After clicking “Yes” you will be able to start editing your Master Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Master page the following elements can be edited: &lt;br /&gt;
a)'''Text blocks and images''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may insert images and text blocks within the Master Page. Please note that the images and text blocks inserted on the Master Page can only be edited within the Master Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b)'''Site Menu Editor''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The position of the Site Menu Editor can be changed on the Master Page only. When in ordinary pages, Site Menu Editor can be accessed (new pages can be added, existing ones – deleted), but its position is locked. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''c)Site title and tag line''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the site is build off the Master Page, site title and tag line are considered as Master Page elements and are not editable when in ordinary pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Please note that after finalizing the editing of the Master Page and when clicking on any other page within the site (example: the user may click on '''Products''' or '''Contact''' page to start editing) the master page elements will appear dimmed to enable the user to distinguish the master page elements. This allows the user to view the location of the Master Page elements, and position other elements accordingly. &lt;br /&gt;
5. In order to review the site page without dimmed elements click on '''Preview''' or '''Publish'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be able to see the final site including both Master Page elements as well as ordinary page elements.&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to return to edit the Master page elements:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the '''Save''' button.&lt;br /&gt;
#From the extended menu select '''Edit Master Page'''.&lt;br /&gt;
You will be returned to the Master Page where you may continue to edit the elements within the Master Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage Pages==&lt;br /&gt;
Manage Pages allows you to create, rename and duplicate pages. This section allows you to structure and organize the naming conventions you wish to utilize on your site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manage_Pages.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create New Page===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the name of the page &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a page title. The page title should be related and relevant to your page content. The page title appears on top of your browser and is a significant element in the search engine with regards to rankings. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a summary of your new page and try to include relevant keywords as some search engines will use this summary as part of the website results. This summary will not be visible on your page, its purpose being to provide a clear definition of what your page contains with a significant relation to the search engine. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter several keywords that you would like your page to be found by. These keywords can also be phrases containing words found on your main site as well as on this newly created page. Please make sure that the keywords chosen are to be found in your page content as these keywords will be used by search engines to find your page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply''' to create the new page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create_new_page.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Delete a Page=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Select from Existing Pages the name of the page you wish to delete. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Delete Page''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Duplicate a Page=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Select from Existing Pages the name of the page you wish to duplicate. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Duplicate page'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Edit a Page=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Select from Existing Pages the name of the page you wish to edit &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Page Properties''' or '''Edit Page Content''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Complete Your Edit===&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished managing your pages click '''Close'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding or Editing a Text Block== &lt;br /&gt;
Adding texts allows additional customization to your site. Many of the text blocks that exist in each of the designs are placeholders that require editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Adding a Text Block=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the text icon and a text block will appear. &lt;br /&gt;
#In order to help you find the initial location of the new textbox, the border around the new textbox will flash for a moment after it appears.&lt;br /&gt;
#Type/Paste text into the text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once you are finished adding text, click outside of the text block within the Page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing a Text Block===&lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text; a grayed boxed area will appear on the text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be able to edit text once the outline is visible&lt;br /&gt;
#Type/Paste text into the text block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Once you are finished adding text, click somewhere on the page outside of the Text Block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit_Text_box.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Resize a Text Block=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text block. &lt;br /&gt;
#Mouse over the smaller boxes for the direction you wish to increase the size of the text block. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold your mouse on the small box. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse in the direction you wish to resize the text block. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Delete a Text Block===&lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text block. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''X''' on the bottom right corner. &lt;br /&gt;
#The text block should now be removed &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Duplicate a Text Block===&lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text block you wish to duplicate.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on located on the bottom right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
#The text block should now be duplicated.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold the duplicate text block to the desired location&lt;br /&gt;
#Unclick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Move a Text Block===&lt;br /&gt;
#Put your mouse over the text you wish to move &lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move your mouse to the location where you wish to place your text. &lt;br /&gt;
#Unclick &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Layer Control==&lt;br /&gt;
Layers are a common method for determining which objects should cover (or obscure) another object. Layers determine if objects should overlap (or one is directly on top of the other). Objects such as text fields and images which are on a &amp;quot;higher&amp;quot; layer can cover objects which are on a &amp;quot;lower&amp;quot; layer. Although this is supported in some drawing applications, in EasySiteWizard, no two objects can be at the same layer level. &lt;br /&gt;
Layer control can be managed in EasySiteWizard by right-clicking on an object that the user would like to move to another layer. Right-clicking an editable object (text area or image) should bring up the following menu options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Bring to front: This will put the selected object &amp;quot;on top of&amp;quot; all other objects. All other images and text fields, if moved so they overlap the object which has been &amp;quot;sent to front&amp;quot; will not obscure this field. &lt;br /&gt;
If a second object is selected and &amp;quot;bring to front&amp;quot; is used, then this second object would be considered &amp;quot;on top of&amp;quot; the first one. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Send to back: This will put the selected object &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; all other objects. Essentially, the opposite of &amp;quot;bring to front&amp;quot;; all overlapping text areas or images will obscure the object that was sent to the back. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If a second object is selected and &amp;quot;send to back&amp;quot; is used, then this second object would be considered &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; the first one. &lt;br /&gt;
*Move forwards: This will move the object one layer closer to the front. &lt;br /&gt;
*Send backwards: This will move the object one layer closer to the back. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add a table== &lt;br /&gt;
You can add a table by simply clicking on the “add table” button within the Editor Toolbar. &lt;br /&gt;
When you click on “Add table” icon the following table editor pop up will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add_a_table.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can set the number of columns and rows of your table as well as the height, width and border type by entering the values in the provided boxes. You may set up the border of your table by clicking on the button next to the “Border” section. The following table border editor will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Table_border.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the style of your border from the drop down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose your thickness from the drop down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a color by clicking on the button next to the color section. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply/Cancel''' to save/dismiss the changes made. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note:''' You will be able to see a preview of your border on the same page under the '''Border Preview''' section. &lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note:''' Once you have created your table by double clicking on it you will be able to change the table settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an Image==&lt;br /&gt;
You can build your own library of images by uploading the image files; and or utilize the free image library to place additional images into your site. When you click on the icon a menu pops up on the left side of the screen, this allows you to add additional images to your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add_an_image.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 Types of Libraries: &lt;br /&gt;
#Your library. &lt;br /&gt;
#Free library &lt;br /&gt;
#Template images &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Upload an Image to “Your library”=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the top menu picture icon to add an image. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Upload''' button. New window will appear allowing you to browse your local computer for the images you would like to put on your site.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Browse”. &lt;br /&gt;
#Search for image on your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Check off “Optimize” if you wish to scale down your image size and keep the aspect ratio. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Upload.” Once your image is uploaded it will be located in a panel underneath “Upload” to view a larger version of your image, click on the magnifying glass . &lt;br /&gt;
#With your mouse, click and hold the image you wish to insert into your webpage. &lt;br /&gt;
#Move your mouse to the desired location of the image. &lt;br /&gt;
#Unclick. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the on the bottom right corner to close Images. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Use the Free library=== &lt;br /&gt;
Free library houses approximately 10,000 stock images available for you to use on your site. &lt;br /&gt;
1. Click on the Free library tab. &lt;br /&gt;
2. Select the category best suited for you site (i.e. Nature). \&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a. You can search through the entire image library by keyword by selecting &amp;quot;All Categories&amp;quot; and conducting a keyword search. &lt;br /&gt;
b. You can refine your search by selecting a specific category and then searching by keyword. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Click and Hold the image you wish to place onto your site. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Move your mouse to the desired location. Unclick. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Delete an Image from your Site=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click the Image. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Red X &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Resize an Image from “Your library” or “Free library”=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click the image. &lt;br /&gt;
#Mouse over the smaller boxes for the direction you wish to increase the size of the Image. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click and hold your mouse on the small box &lt;br /&gt;
#Move the mouse in the direction you wish to resize the Image. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, that you cannot resize any of the default images provided by the design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Image Properties===&lt;br /&gt;
Image Editor allows you to modify images from “Your library” or “Free library.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding Image Properties &lt;br /&gt;
#Double click on the image you wish to modify. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Image Properties'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#The image properties screen will pop up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the image properties interface, you can add a clickable link (URL) to the image, as well as alt text which will be displayed if the user's browser is not set to automatically load images. If you add a link, you can also specify that the link should open in a new window by placing a checkmark beside &amp;quot;open in a new window&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing Images=== &lt;br /&gt;
Modifying an image with Image Editor &lt;br /&gt;
#Double click on the image you wish to modify. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit'''.&lt;br /&gt;
#The image editor screen will pop up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imageeditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Image Editor allows you to modify images you have uploaded or selected from the library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Undo/Redo===&lt;br /&gt;
You can undo/redo as many steps as you wish based on the current section and actions done per session. &lt;br /&gt;
#Undo &lt;br /&gt;
Click on the undo icon to undo your last action you have done. &lt;br /&gt;
#Redo &lt;br /&gt;
Click on to redo icon to redo your last action you have done. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Modifying Text=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text block; a boxed grayed area will appear on the Text Block. &lt;br /&gt;
#You will be able to edit text once the button is visible. Click this button in order to edit the text. &lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight the text you wish to Bold, Italicize, and or Underline. &lt;br /&gt;
#Once you are finished modifying text, click somewhere on the page outside of the text block. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Modifying Font Style, Colors, and Text Size=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text block you wish to modify. &lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight the text you wish to modify. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#A screen will pop up allowing you to Select Colors. &lt;br /&gt;
#Use the bar in order to select the Font Style and Font Size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create a Hyperlink to another Page or Site=== &lt;br /&gt;
Hyperlinks allow you to refer to pages that exist within your website and sites outside of your own domain. &lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight the text you wish to link from. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on to insert a link onto your page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===External Website=== &lt;br /&gt;
1. Type in the desired URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Hyperlink.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Apply''' to insert the link on your page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Internal page on my website===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose an existing page on your website from the drop down menu.  &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply''' to insert the chosen link. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Document or other file===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#You may also upload a file by clicking on “Browse”. The pop up will prompt you to localize the file on your computer. &lt;br /&gt;
#Once you have localized the file you wish to upload click on '''Apply'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Send Email===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an email address. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on '''Apply''' to insert the link. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create a Bulleted Lists==  &lt;br /&gt;
Bulleted lists help organize text when sentences or paragraphs are not required. There are two ways to create bulleted lists. You can either use existing text to create you lists, or you can create a fresh list by creating a new text block. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a Bulleted List with Existing Text=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click an existing text block &lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight the text you wish to put in your bulleted list &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the bullet icon. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using a New Text Block to Create a Bulleted List=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new text block &lt;br /&gt;
#Click bullet icon. &lt;br /&gt;
#A bullet will appear; type in your text &lt;br /&gt;
#Hit the “Enter” key on your keyboard to set your next bullet &lt;br /&gt;
#Repeat steps 3-4 till bulleted list is complete &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create a Heading==  &lt;br /&gt;
Headings are primarily used as titles to indicate the meaning of a section of text. There are two ways to create headings. You can use an existing line of text, or create a fresh new heading. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using an Existing Line of Text to Create a Heading=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click an existing Text Block. &lt;br /&gt;
#Highlight the Text you wish to make into a Heading. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a New Heading=== &lt;br /&gt;
#Create a new text block. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click &lt;br /&gt;
#Type in the text you wish to use for your heading. &lt;br /&gt;
#Once you satisfied with your Heading, Click '''Enter''' to begin a new line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Check Spelling==  &lt;br /&gt;
Spell check is available to verify the spelling within each text block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to Check Spelling within a Text Block===&lt;br /&gt;
#Double left click on the text block you wish to check spelling for. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the “Check spelling” tool in the Editor Toolbar. &lt;br /&gt;
#Words which appear to be spelled incorrectly are outlined in red. Click on the red outline and select from the option list for the correct word. It will automatically be corrected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The incorrect word is outlined in red. Drop down menu allows you to select from a list of possible words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding Widget to your Page==  &lt;br /&gt;
Widgets are special plug-ins which you can insert into your website, which provide advanced features to your site that are easily configured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Google Maps=== &lt;br /&gt;
Click the “Widgets&amp;quot; icon and select &amp;quot;Google Map&amp;quot;; this will place a Google map onto your site. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an API Key. a. To get an API Key click on “Get A Key” link. &lt;br /&gt;
a.Register for a Free API Key. &lt;br /&gt;
b.An API Key must be created in order for Google to allow linking to their maps. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Address you wish to use for the map. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select map size (i.e. Small, Medium, Large) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you are satisfied with the location of your map, click '''Apply'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remove Google Map from your site'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Double click the grey bar on top of your Google Map. A red “X” should appear on the bottom right hand corner. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the “X.” &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Superpages.com Maps'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the Address you wish to use for the map. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select map size (i.e. Small, Medium, Large) &lt;br /&gt;
#Once you are satisfied with the location of your map, click “Apply”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ACCA RSS Feed===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the width and height and click on “Apply”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Analog Clock===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Analog_clock.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the width and height and click on '''Apply'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Digital Clock===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Digital.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the width and height and click on '''Apply'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Twitter===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Twitter.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Configure the look and feel of twitter on your page by choosing the desired design such as background and text color.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Countdown===&lt;br /&gt;
With this widget you can set up a countdown to a specific date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the background and text color and size from the available options. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the specific date on which you should be notified. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the text which should be displayed when notified on the specified date. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Visitor Counter=== &lt;br /&gt;
You can customize the counter's font, size and color to suit the design of your site. The hit counter provides you with a very basic measure of your site's traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===YouTube===&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a YouTube video on your page by providing the relevant URL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Youtube.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Poll===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a question to be displayed on your page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the “add” button to enter a new option. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the font color and width. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Apply” to display it on your page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS Feed===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a URL. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose the width, height and style. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Apply” to save the changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Facebook===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Facebook_widget.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Press “Like button” to set the widget’s configuration; &lt;br /&gt;
#The screen appears that offers options to input detailed settings that will be used to create the widget &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill in the offered fields to create a widget: &lt;br /&gt;
'''URL to Like:''' Insert the URL to like; &lt;br /&gt;
'''Layout Style:''' Determines size and amount of social context next to the button. &lt;br /&gt;
'''Show Faces:''' Check the box if you want the profile pictures to be shown below the button. &lt;br /&gt;
'''Width:''' Set the width of the plugin, in pixels. &lt;br /&gt;
'''Verb to display:''' Select the verb you want to be displayed near the button &lt;br /&gt;
'''Font:''' Select the font of the plugin &lt;br /&gt;
'''Color Scheme:''' Select the color scheme of the plugin.&lt;br /&gt;
#When all the fields are filled in press “Apply” to save the changes; Press “Cancel” to return to the Editor. &lt;br /&gt;
#At the site page you will see the widget created. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preview==&lt;br /&gt;
Preview launches a new browser which allows you to view the site prior to publishing. To preview the site, click on “Preview.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Publish==  &lt;br /&gt;
Once you are satisfied with the content you have created with EasySiteWizard Pro, you may wish to publish the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Publishing Your Site''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click to publish your site. &lt;br /&gt;
#A prompt will appear, indicating that any existing content will be overwritten. &lt;br /&gt;
#Check the URL location (i.e. http://screenshots.company.com). &lt;br /&gt;
#Click “Yes”/“No” to accept/dismiss publishing the site &lt;br /&gt;
#A prompt will appear notifying you that your site has been published to specified URL. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Publish.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Tutorial= &lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on this button you will be presented with a flash demo on how to use EasySiteWizard application.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click tutorial to see a flash demo of the particular heading, icons and buttons within the document. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=OsCommerce_Templates&amp;diff=791</id>
		<title>OsCommerce Templates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=OsCommerce_Templates&amp;diff=791"/>
				<updated>2014-02-19T16:36:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Manage &amp;amp;nbsp;OS&amp;amp;nbsp;Commerce&amp;amp;nbsp; */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Overview  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
osCommerce is an Open-Source-based online e-commerce solution that is available for free under the GNU General Public License. It features a rich set of out-of-the-box online shopping cart functionality that allows store owners to set up, run, and maintain their online stores with minimum effort and with no costs, fees, or limitations involved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The osCommerce application will allow you to easily install and uninstall osCommerce on your domain. The application also provides an easy way to access your storefront and osCommerce's administration interface, which is used to configure or edit your store's selection of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Installing OS Commerce  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To install osCommerce:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the osCommerce installation application. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''install osCommerce'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a template for your storefront. Clicking on a thumbnail from the list on the left will display a larger preview image to the right.When you have decided on a template, click '''Next'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all required fields including username, password and owners name. Click '''Next.&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a directory to install your store under.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will not be allowed to install your store in a directory which already contains data. &lt;br /&gt;
#To create a new directory or subdirectory to use,&amp;amp;nbsp;select an existing directory from the list, type a directory name in the text area provided, and click '''create directory'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#osCommerce needs to create a database in order to run. Enter a database password for the database that will be created. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a username and password for your administration directory. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will need to know this username and password in order to configure your osCommerce store. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your store has been successfully installed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''to go to osCommerce's administration interface to configure your store. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will be required to enter the administration login and password that you created in step&amp;amp;nbsp;7 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Uninstalling OS Commerce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To uninstall osCommerc'''e: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the osCommerce installation application. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the window that opens, click '''uninstall osCommerce'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;WARNING: All of your store data will be permanently removed, even if you reinstall your osCommerce store at a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;osCommerce has now been uninstalled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Go to OS Commerxce&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have installed OS Commerce in order to visit your page you must select '''Go to OS Commerce'''. This will launch it in a new browser window. You will be able to view you store here.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Manage &amp;amp;nbsp;OS&amp;amp;nbsp;Commerce&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To mange your os Commerce account you will need your username and password. Here you will be able to manage your settings.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For detailed information on configuring your store, please read the documentation provided by osCommerce. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=OsCommerce_Templates&amp;diff=790</id>
		<title>OsCommerce Templates</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=OsCommerce_Templates&amp;diff=790"/>
				<updated>2014-02-18T20:44:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Overview  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
osCommerce is an Open-Source-based online e-commerce solution that is available for free under the GNU General Public License. It features a rich set of out-of-the-box online shopping cart functionality that allows store owners to set up, run, and maintain their online stores with minimum effort and with no costs, fees, or limitations involved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The osCommerce application will allow you to easily install and uninstall osCommerce on your domain. The application also provides an easy way to access your storefront and osCommerce's administration interface, which is used to configure or edit your store's selection of products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Installing OS Commerce  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To install osCommerce:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the osCommerce installation application. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''install osCommerce'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a template for your storefront. Clicking on a thumbnail from the list on the left will display a larger preview image to the right.When you have decided on a template, click '''Next'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all required fields including username, password and owners name. Click '''Next.&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a directory to install your store under.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will not be allowed to install your store in a directory which already contains data. &lt;br /&gt;
#To create a new directory or subdirectory to use,&amp;amp;nbsp;select an existing directory from the list, type a directory name in the text area provided, and click '''create directory'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#osCommerce needs to create a database in order to run. Enter a database password for the database that will be created. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a username and password for your administration directory. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will need to know this username and password in order to configure your osCommerce store. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your store has been successfully installed. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''to go to osCommerce's administration interface to configure your store. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will be required to enter the administration login and password that you created in step&amp;amp;nbsp;7 above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Uninstalling OS Commerce&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''To uninstall osCommerc'''e: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Open the osCommerce installation application. &lt;br /&gt;
#In the window that opens, click '''uninstall osCommerce'''. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;WARNING: All of your store data will be permanently removed, even if you reinstall your osCommerce store at a later date. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;osCommerce has now been uninstalled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Go to OS Commerxce&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have installed OS Commerce in order to visit your page you must select '''Go to OS Commerce'''. This will launch it in a new browser window. You will be able to view you store here.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Manage &amp;amp;nbsp;OS&amp;amp;nbsp;Commerce&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To mange your os Commerce account you will need your username and password. Here you will be able to manage your settings.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For detailed information on configuring your store, please read the documentation provided by osCommerce. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a _fcknotitle=&amp;quot;true&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;Category:Setup&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Setup&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Advanced_Web_Counter&amp;diff=789</id>
		<title>Advanced Web Counter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Advanced_Web_Counter&amp;diff=789"/>
				<updated>2014-01-31T20:56:46Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;=Overview=  This tool lets you create a customized web counter by choosing from among the different design style options offered below. The HTML code needed for the chosen des...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Overview=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tool lets you create a customized web counter by choosing from among the different design style options offered below. The HTML code needed for the chosen design style is automatically generated in the appropriate text box. Options such as Counter Preview and Import to HTML file are also available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Start Count at==&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number you want your web counter to start at. If you want it to start counter at 5 enter the number 5. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Text Color==&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the color you want your text to appear in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Text Offset== &lt;br /&gt;
Specifies how much to offset the text. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Background==&lt;br /&gt;
Choose what you want to be you background. There is a wide variety of choice from plain colors to flowers.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Reset Counter==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want your counter to reset and start from the beginning all your have to do is press the '''Reset Counter to 0''' button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==HTML==&lt;br /&gt;
You can either grab the HTML and place the code into your website. Or you can import it to an HTML file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category=Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Emmarketing&amp;diff=788</id>
		<title>Emmarketing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Emmarketing&amp;diff=788"/>
				<updated>2013-09-05T13:22:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Redirected page to Email Marketing&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Email Marketing]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Email_Marketing&amp;diff=787</id>
		<title>Email Marketing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Email_Marketing&amp;diff=787"/>
				<updated>2013-08-22T16:10:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An easy way to create professional email marketing campaigns to reach customers, promote your business and help drive traffic to your website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Home  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Home page will allow you to view the most up to date information on your website an campaigns. It will also allow you to view reports, old campaigns, and lists. With the drag and drop feature you can arrange the home page however you like. The Home page will also give you access to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Emails Lists &lt;br /&gt;
*Tools &lt;br /&gt;
*Account &lt;br /&gt;
*Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Emails  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you will create and manage your email campaigns. To get started you can choose New, Drafts or Sent Emails. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setup  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section is where you will setup: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email Name &lt;br /&gt;
*From label and subject line &lt;br /&gt;
*Unsubscribe info &lt;br /&gt;
*Company name and address &lt;br /&gt;
*Reply to Email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once these have all been filled out please click '''Next'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Design  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can choose how you want to customize and design your email campaigns. You have four options to choose from:&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Email Wizard:''' This is the most recommended option. The wizard will guide you through customizing your campaign. &amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Email Canvas:''' our WYSIWYG editor: build from scratch or use a template. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Freeform HTML:''' Got HTML? Just copy &amp;amp;amp; paste your pre-built code. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Text Only: '''Create a basic email without pictures or logos.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have chosen which option you want to use please click '''Next''' if you want to continue or '''Back''' if you need to change your information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now start to customize your email by choosing a: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Template&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Overall Style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Email Option&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now be able to add your own text, move tiles around and add pictures that seem fitting to your campign. You can also view your email in a broweser to see how it will look to your customers.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preview&amp;amp;nbsp;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you send an email look it over and send one to yourself. You can view it in both HTML and Text on to see how it looks. &amp;amp;nbsp;When you have finished previewing your email click '''Next.'''&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recipients&amp;amp;nbsp;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one or more mailing lists to receive your email. Click '''Next'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Send &amp;amp;nbsp;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you've completed the steps, schedule your email. Then click Send Email. You can also save your email to use it at a different time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drafts&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View all your draft email campaigns here.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sent Emails&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View all of your sent email campaigns and track the performance in real time.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Lists&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you will create your mailing list, manage your emails and create opt in forms.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New List&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new list you will need tos&amp;amp;nbsp;upply a name and description. Then you will need to add list members, either by:&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a new list one member at a time&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Create a new list from an external file&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Create a new list by importing list members from your web-based email client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opt-In Forms  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Capture new sign-ups from your website and blog visitors by creating a form. You can design it, customize an opt-in email and publish all right from this section!&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Segments&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Segement your list by using custom made filters to organize your email addresses. Download the user guide if more details are needed!&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== List Fields&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tools to create, modify or delete fields for all lists. Be sure to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these tools to increase your productivity.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Calendar&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calendar view of your emails, postcards, personal events and holidays.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Library&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View and upload images that you will use for campaigns. You can also check out the gallery that provides free images for you to use.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Account&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out all your contact information and information about your company. You can also upload your logo here which will appear on your account Home page. Once you have saved your companys name you will also see this in the upper right hand corner.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Help&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The help section will bring you to a list of FAQs that will provide some guidance on questions you may have.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Marketing]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Email_Marketing&amp;diff=786</id>
		<title>Email Marketing</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Email_Marketing&amp;diff=786"/>
				<updated>2013-08-22T16:06:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;= Overview  =  An easy way to create professional email marketing campaigns to reach customers, promote your business and help drive traffic to your website.   = Home  =  The ...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An easy way to create professional email marketing campaigns to reach customers, promote your business and help drive traffic to your website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Home  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Home page will allow you to view the most up to date information on your website an campaigns. It will also allow you to view reports, old campaigns, and lists. With the drag and drop feature you can arrange the home page however you like. The Home page will also give you access to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Emails Lists &lt;br /&gt;
*Tools &lt;br /&gt;
*Account &lt;br /&gt;
*Help&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Emails  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you will create and manage your email campaigns. To get started you can choose New, Drafts or Sent Emails. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Setup  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section is where you will setup: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Email Name &lt;br /&gt;
*From label and subject line &lt;br /&gt;
*Unsubscribe info &lt;br /&gt;
*Company name and address &lt;br /&gt;
*Reply to Email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once these have all been filled out please click '''Next'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Design  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you can choose how you want to customize and design your email campaigns. You have four options to choose from:&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Email Wizard:''' This is the most recommended option. The wizard will guide you through customizing your campaign. &amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Email Canvas:''' our WYSIWYG editor: build from scratch or use a template. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Freeform HTML:''' Got HTML? Just copy &amp;amp;amp; paste your pre-built code. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Text Only: '''Create a basic email without pictures or logos.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have chosen which option you want to use please click '''Next''' if you want to continue or '''Back''' if you need to change your information. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now start to customize your email by choosing a: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Template&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Overall Style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Email Option&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now be able to add your own text, move tiles around and add pictures that seem fitting to your campign. You can also view your email in a broweser to see how it will look to your customers.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Preview&amp;amp;nbsp;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before you send an email look it over and send one to yourself. You can view it in both HTML and Text on to see how it looks. &amp;amp;nbsp;When you have finished previewing your email click '''Next.'''&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Recipients&amp;amp;nbsp;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one or more mailing lists to receive your email. Click '''Next'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Send &amp;amp;nbsp;  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you've completed the steps, schedule your email. Then click Send Email. You can also save your email to use it at a different time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Drafts&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View all your draft email campaigns here.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sent Emails&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View all of your sent email campaigns and track the performance in real time.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Lists&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is where you will create your mailing list, manage your emails and create opt in forms.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== New List&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a new list you will need tos&amp;amp;nbsp;upply a name and description. Then you will need to add list members, either by:&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Creating a new list one member at a time&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Create a new list from an external file&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
*Create a new list by importing list members from your web-based email client&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Opt-In Forms  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Capture new sign-ups from your website and blog visitors by creating a form. You can design it, customize an opt-in email and publish all right from this section!&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Segments&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Segement your list by using custom made filters to organize your email addresses. Download the user guide if more details are needed!&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== List Fields&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the tools to create, modify or delete fields for all lists. Be sure to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use these tools to increase your productivity.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Calendar&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Calendar view of your emails, postcards, personal events and holidays.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Library&amp;amp;nbsp;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
View and upload images that you will use for campaigns. You can also check out the gallery that provides free images for you to use.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Account&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill out all your contact information and information about your company. You can also upload your logo here which will appear on your account Home page. Once you have saved your companys name you will also see this in the upper right hand corner.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Help&amp;amp;nbsp;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The help section will bring you to a list of FAQs that will provide some guidance on questions you may have.&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a _fcknotitle=&amp;quot;true&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;Category:Marketing&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Marketing&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Online_Forms&amp;diff=785</id>
		<title>Online Forms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Online_Forms&amp;diff=785"/>
				<updated>2013-07-08T16:20:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== Overview  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This application allows you to build Online Forms to collect various data from your visitors.Online forms will provide with you with an easy to use template to create the specific forms you may need. Click Get Started to begin!&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create New Form  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add Field&amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a template form you willl begin by selecting what type of data you may want. Choose from the following fields:&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Single Line Text&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Paragraph Text&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Full Name&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Street Address&lt;br /&gt;
*State/Zip Code&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Country/City&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Phone&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Company&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Notes&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Section Break&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Field Settings&amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next you will have to adijust the field settings. I.e. what fields are required to be fille out. You may also add a field or duplicate the field you are highlighted on.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Form Settings &amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will allow you to add a title and description to your form. This title will help you identify your templates for future reference. You will also be able to adjust the follwoing:&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Background Colour&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Border Colour&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
*Text Colour&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Choose the colours you want from the palette on the right.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have adjusted all of your setting and added all necessary fields click '''Save Form'''.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage &amp;amp;nbsp;Forms  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Manage Forms page allows you to search for all your form templates and select which one you want to work with. They will be sorted by name and date. You can edit forms, change settings, publish, download or delete any forms here.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Edit Forms&amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the form you want to work on&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Edit Form'''&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Make necessary changes and select '''Save Form&amp;amp;nbsp;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Publish Forms&amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To publish your form to your website you have two options:&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Publish''' when you hover over the manage button OR&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click your form title, then select '''Publish '''once you are viewing your form.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
Once you select Publish you will be prompted to confirm '''Yes''' or '''No''' where you want this specific form published.&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Download HTML&amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To donwload an HTML version you can either:&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select Download HTML when you hover over the manage button OR &lt;br /&gt;
#Click your form title, then select Download HTML once you are viewing your form&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both ways will download an HTML version of your form.&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Delete a Form&amp;amp;nbsp; ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete one of your forms:&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to Manage Forms&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Find the form your want to delete&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
#Hover over the mange button and select '''Delete Form&amp;amp;nbsp;'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=784</id>
		<title>Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=784"/>
				<updated>2013-06-14T17:34:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Intro=&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your new Control Panel! Once you sign in you will have access to all of our new applications to help you create the business website you want! Whether you want to create a social campaign, a mobile website or a business card we can help. The Control Panel offers you a variety of options which you can access from the easy to use home page! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AplusLogin.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Home= &lt;br /&gt;
The Home page gives you quick access to everything you need to get started! You can view all your recent activity and newly purchased items in the Home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AplusHome.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Take a Tour== &lt;br /&gt;
When you log in to your Control Panel for the first time you will be prompted to take a tour of your new Control Panel. This tour will outline all the cool new features you will be able to use for your site! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage your Account== &lt;br /&gt;
To change your account information, credit card info or to see what services you have purchased click Mange Your Account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:manage.jpg|200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Tips== &lt;br /&gt;
For quick info take a look at the Control Panel tips on the right side of the Home Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tips.jpg|200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Recent Activity==&lt;br /&gt;
This area will display all your recent activity and purchased items. You can click the item you have purchased and get started right away! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:recent.jpg|400px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Start Services=&lt;br /&gt;
The Start Services section is where you will begin to build your businesses website. Here you can access all the services you have purchased, view your emails, see how much storage you have left and manage your domains. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Currently Managing== &lt;br /&gt;
The Currently Managing feature allows you to change which domain you are working on, by selecting an option from the drop down menu. Once you have chosen the domain you want, all the work you do with the applications will appear on that chosen website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AplusStartServices.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Shop Section=&lt;br /&gt;
The Shop section is your go to place for all services you may need to make your business successful online.  You can purchase many different services from hosting packages to mobile services or social tools. Everything you need to create a great website can be bought here! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AplusShop.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Support=&lt;br /&gt;
The Support section provides you with information for billing, emails, domains, websites, design services and more! You can view our FAQ about specific services or even type in a question in our search bar! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:AplusSupport.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Support Messages== 	&lt;br /&gt;
Can’t find what you are looking for? You may contact us for additional support through live chat, email or phone. Your message will be answered and displayed in the Message Center.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Contact.jpg|400px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=783</id>
		<title>Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Control_Panel&amp;diff=783"/>
				<updated>2013-06-14T17:05:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=Intro=&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your new Control Panel! Once you sign in you will have access to all of our new applications to help you create the business website you want! Whether you want to create a social campaign, a mobile website or a business card we can help. The Control Panel offers you a variety of options which you can access from the easy to use home page! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:intro.png|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Home= &lt;br /&gt;
The Home page gives you quick access to everything you need to get started! You can view all your recent activity and newly purchased items in the Home page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:home.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Take a Tour== &lt;br /&gt;
When you log in to your Control Panel for the first time you will be prompted to take a tour of your new Control Panel. This tour will outline all the cool new features you will be able to use for your site! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manage your Account== &lt;br /&gt;
To change your account information, credit card info or to see what services you have purchased click Mange Your Account. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:manage.jpg|200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Tips== &lt;br /&gt;
For quick info take a look at the Control Panel tips on the right side of the Home Page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:tips.jpg|200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Recent Activity==&lt;br /&gt;
This area will display all your recent activity and purchased items. You can click the item you have purchased and get started right away! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:recent.jpg|400px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Start Services=&lt;br /&gt;
The Start Services section is where you will begin to build your businesses website. Here you can access all the services you have purchased, view your emails, see how much storage you have left and manage your domains. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Currently Managing== &lt;br /&gt;
The Currently Managing feature allows you to change which domain you are working on, by selecting an option from the drop down menu. Once you have chosen the domain you want, all the work you do with the applications will appear on that chosen website. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:managing.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
=Shop Section=&lt;br /&gt;
The Shop section is your go to place for all services you may need to make your business successful online.  You can purchase many different services from hosting packages to mobile services or social tools. Everything you need to create a great website can be bought here! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:shop.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Support=&lt;br /&gt;
The Support section provides you with information for billing, emails, domains, websites, design services and more! You can view our FAQ about specific services or even type in a question in our search bar! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:support.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Support Messages== 	&lt;br /&gt;
Can’t find what you are looking for? You may contact us for additional support through live chat, email or phone. Your message will be answered and displayed in the Message Center.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Contact.jpg|400px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnr_Manager&amp;diff=782</id>
		<title>Dnr Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnr_Manager&amp;diff=782"/>
				<updated>2013-05-21T11:54:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Redirected page to Domain Registration Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; #REDIRECT [[Domain_Registration_Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnrmanager&amp;diff=781</id>
		<title>Dnrmanager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnrmanager&amp;diff=781"/>
				<updated>2013-05-21T11:53:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: WikiSysop moved page Dnrmanager to Domain Registration Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Domain Registration Manager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Domain_Registration_Manager&amp;diff=780</id>
		<title>Domain Registration Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Domain_Registration_Manager&amp;diff=780"/>
				<updated>2013-05-21T11:53:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: WikiSysop moved page Dnrmanager to Domain Registration Manager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This application allows you to change domain privacy, name servers, renewal settings and request EPP code for registered domain names, as well as check domain transfer and renewal statuses. With the help of the Domain Manager application you will acquire custom nameservers, including the ability to modify existing zone files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Main Menu you will be able to choose from the following three options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manage Domain Name &lt;br /&gt;
*EPP Code/Password Management &lt;br /&gt;
*Domain Contacts &lt;br /&gt;
*Edit Zone File&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Domain Name  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;margin: 0px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This section allows you to change private &lt;br /&gt;
registration option, name servers, renewal settings for registered &lt;br /&gt;
domain names, as well as check domain transfer and renewal statuses&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Private Registration List &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a domain &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Domain Privacy List''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Select the privacy mode you would like to set for this domain &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Update Name Servers  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a domain &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter your domain name server &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:'''If you want to create a custom name server, '''click Add Custom NS''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Renew Now  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would like to renew your domain name: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''Renew Now''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You will be brought to the Shop Section where you must select the domain you want to renew &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a '''renewal length''' (priced accordingly) &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Submit'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= EPP Code/ Password Management  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to request to have the EPP transfer code sent to the Registrant email address listed on your domain. You can also reset EPP transfer code that was previously sent to the Registrant email address listed on your domain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''To request and EPP code'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the Password Management page, click Manage EPP Code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Select a domain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click Request. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''To reset an EPP code:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the Password Management page, click Manage EPP Code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Select a domain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Click Reset. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Change Password'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to change the password associated with your domain name. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''To change the domain name password:'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.In the Password Management page, click Change Password. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Enter the new password. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Enter the new password again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Click Apply. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Domain Contacts  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit WHOIS information for your registered domain names. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a '''domain''' to edit, click '''Apply''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Now you may edit the current information on this domain &lt;br /&gt;
#Once you have updated your information click '''Apply'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Edit Zone File  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to modify your custom nameservers, as well as A, CNAME and MX records associated to your registered domain names. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select a Record to edit or click '''Add Record''' to add a new network &lt;br /&gt;
#If desired change name, type or value &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' to see changes &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' to confirm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Activation may take up to one business day to be completed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnr_Manager&amp;diff=779</id>
		<title>Dnr Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnr_Manager&amp;diff=779"/>
				<updated>2013-05-21T11:46:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Redirected page to Dnrmanager&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; #REDIRECT [[Dnrmanager]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnr_Manager&amp;diff=778</id>
		<title>Dnr Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Dnr_Manager&amp;diff=778"/>
				<updated>2013-05-21T11:26:04Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; &amp;amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;/en/index.php/Dnrmanager&amp;quot; title=&amp;quot;Dnrrmanager&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;RTENOTITLE&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasyStoreMaker&amp;diff=777</id>
		<title>EasyStoreMaker</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasyStoreMaker&amp;diff=777"/>
				<updated>2013-04-12T17:58:08Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Templates */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= '''Introduction'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EasyStoreMaker Pro is a world-class online ecommerce tool that allows you to create a dynamic storefront and profitable online business. With the assistance of EasyStoreMaker Pro’s tools and setup wizards, you can easily incorporate a variety of payment gateways, product catalogues, international currencies, local tax calculations, shipping and handling calculations, language conversions, and auto messaging. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Expand your footprint and be available to your customers and prospects 24/7 by using EasyStoreMaker Pro today. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Using the main menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu provides you with an easy way to access the various sections of ESM Pro's interfaces.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Configuration Wizard''' guides you through the initial set-up process. You can also use the wizard to change your existing settings. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Store Configuration''' allows you to access specific parts of the store's configuration interface. This option can be used to manually set up your store, or jump directly to a portion of the configuration interface to make settings changes. &lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Add Product Wizard''' is a convenient quick link to add products to your store, taking you directly to the Product configuration menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Order Management''' takes you to the order processing interface, where you can view orders which are awaiting shipment. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''View Store''' opens a new window which displays your store in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would rather go directly to the Store Configuration interface when you run ESM Pro, place a checkmark beside &amp;quot;Do not show me this again. Go directly to my home page on next startup&amp;quot; (located at the bottom of the screen).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have done this and want to see this page again, click the &amp;quot;getting started&amp;quot; link at the top of the screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Configuration Wizard'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this first step, enter all contact information for your store. This information will be used by visitors to your website who wish to contact the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the store to function correctly, you must enter your Country and State or Province where you physically operate your store from. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can hide your mailing address from the storefront by enabling &amp;quot;Hide address/phone in footer&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished filling in your contact information, click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can provide a name for your store and upload or link to a store logo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload an image from your computer, click the &amp;quot;browse...&amp;quot; button. Use the window that opens to locate the image on your computer and click &amp;quot;ok&amp;quot;. Click the &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; button to upload the image to your store. &lt;br /&gt;
*To link to an image which has already been uploaded or is on a website, enter the URL in the &amp;quot;image path&amp;quot; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Message details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with customizable messages which are displayed to customers in specific situations. You can at your discretion fill them in or leave them blank; your store will still function properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Introduction Message will be displayed on your storefront's main page &lt;br /&gt;
*The Thank You Message is displayed whenever a customer successfully places an order at your store. You can also include the Thank You Message in any email confirmations the store sends to customers by selecting the &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; radio button directly beneath the Thank You Message text area.&lt;br /&gt;
*The Maintenance Message will be displayed when an order cannot be completed for some reason. &lt;br /&gt;
*The Download File Message is displayed to customers who purchase a downloadable product from your store. &lt;br /&gt;
*The Disclaimer Notice and Privacy Statement text areas are disabled by default. If you wish to have links at the bottom of your store's pages which will display a Disclaimer Notice and/or Privacy Statement, check the box beside the applicable message areas and enter your text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store setting details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manual or Automatic SKU generation. &lt;br /&gt;
*Unit of measurement for Product Weight (if specified in your product information) &lt;br /&gt;
*Product Sorting and Grouping allows you to specify in what order your catalog items will be displayed. To use product sorting and product grouping, place checkmarks beside &amp;quot;Apply sort&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Apply product&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.When creating a new product, you have the choice of using a custom SKU number or an automatically generated SKU (Stock Keeping Unit: a serial number that identifies this specific product) number. Please choose the corresponding radio button: Custom or automatic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Choose a unit weight of your product by clicking on the corresponding radio button: lbs, kg, oz or g.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Sort your products as explained below under “Sort Products”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Group your products as explained below under “Group Products”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Click “Next” to proceed to the next step&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.Click “Previous” to go back to the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order configuration details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step allows you to set up log in information for your order processing interface. The order processing interface allows you to view filled and unfilled orders; it is accessed from a separate URL and requires a login. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The login URL and username is displayed at the top of this section. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select a password for your login using the Password and Confirm Password text boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
*If you would like to receive Email Notifications when orders have been made through your store, select &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; and provide an email address where the notifications will be sent to. Sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, will not be transmitted by email. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select the Language that you would like your order processing interface to use. This setting is separate from whatever language has been set for your storefront.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment type details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate what payment methods your store will accept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Place checkmarks beside the various payment methods you would like to accept. &lt;br /&gt;
*For money orders and C.O.D., you should fill out the applicable Instructions section. This is where you explain to customers who they should (for example) make out their money orders to, mailing address and other important details necessary to complete payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note''' that credit cards can only be processed automatically by your store if you set up a merchant account and payment gateway. You will have an opportunity to configure your gateway in the “Payment Gateways” section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Currency details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency Details section allows you to indicate which currency you would like to use in your store. To enable a currency, click on the enable/disable icon to the right of the currency you would like to enable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to display the currency's symbol, remove the checkmark beside &amp;quot;Include the currency symbol on all store pages&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipping methods  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with various shipping methods which customers can select. There are 3 main categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Regional &lt;br /&gt;
*National&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*International&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category can have subcategories, such as standard delivery, overnight, etc. By default only one shipping method is provided per category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure a shipping method by clicking on the inspection icon (magnifying glass) beside the method, and then entering appropriate information in the section to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can create a new shipping method under a specific shipping category by clicking the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol beside the applicable category. Next, fill in all applicable information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Instructions text area can be used to indicate the specifics of the shipping method, e.g. &amp;quot;Delivery by regular mail, allow one week for delivery&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Templates  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, you can select a template for your store. Store templates affect the color scheme, graphics and specific layout of your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can search through the templates by category, by using the drop-down list above the template thumbnails on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To select a template, scroll through the list provided and click on the template of your choice. When selected, your template will be marked with a blue checkmark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the right, some templates will require you to indicate the size of your product images and thumbnails. This information will be used to ensure that your product images will not appear distorted or stretched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration completed  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your configuration is now complete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Your store has now been configured for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is your first time running the wizard, you will still need to add products to your store for sale; if you wish to automate the process of charging credit cards, you will also need to configure a merchant account (found under the &amp;quot;store configuration&amp;quot; section)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can click the link provided in the centre of the screen to begin adding products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you wish to add products at a later date, click &amp;quot;finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Store Management'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product management  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all products are displayed in the Product Management section. Using the drop-down lists provided, you can display products found in specific catalogs, and sort the order of their display by product name or SKU number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new product, click the Add button (+) located at the top of the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When adding a new product, several sections appear below the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Under Product details, fill in all essential information, such as name, description, SKU number, and Price. You can also set the weight, sale price (click checkmark to apply sale price) and maximum quantity per order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product Prompt section allows you to fill in additional options for your item, such as size or color. To add a prompt, click on the inspection tool beside the first prompt (or second prompt if you have already added one), and fill in the applicable options (e.g. small,medium,large). Click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot; to apply your prompt settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product Images section allows you to specify images of your product, which will be displayed in your store. You can have multiple images set up for a single product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product discount section can be used to set up a discount on your item when a certain quantity of your product has been ordered. Examples: $5.00 off when 3 or more items are purchased; 30% off when more than 10 items are purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can track your Product stock level by filling in the current stock level in the section provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can indicate which catalogs you would like this item to be placed in using the Assign to catalogs section. On the left is a list of all available catalogs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to add your product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product import  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can upload a CSV file which contains data for all of your products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to fill in the CSV file correctly, use the link provided in this section to download a CSV template, which also contains sample products. You can open and edit CSV files in most spreadsheet programs, such as OpenOffice Calc and Microsoft Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload your CSV file, click the &amp;quot;browse&amp;quot; button and use the window that opens to locate your CSV file on your computer. Click &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; to upload your CSV file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CSV file format''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first row of your CSV file should be a &amp;quot;header row&amp;quot;. This row is used as a placeholder, so you can see what kind of information should be located in each column. As EasyStoreMaker is expacting your CSV file to have a header row, it should be present. If it is not, then the first product in your CSV file will be skipped, as it will be in the location that the header row belonged in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header row should contain the following headings, in the order listed (explanations follow): &amp;amp;lt;script language=&amp;quot;JavaScript&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;!-- if ((navigator.appName == &amp;quot;Netscape&amp;quot;) &amp;amp;amp;&amp;amp;amp; (parseInt(navigator.appVersion) == 4)) document.write(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;lt;/table&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;table x-use-null-cells cellspacing='0' width='100%' border='1' bordercolor='black' bordercolorlight='black' bordercolordark='black'&amp;amp;gt;&amp;quot;); //--&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/script&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs4&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs6&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Name &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
! width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs7&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Explanation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
skuname &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter the SKU number of your product. SKU numbers may be a combination of numbers (0-9), dashes (-), or underscores(_), up to a maximum of 25 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you have set your store to automatically generate SKU numbers, then this field should be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productname &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of your product. This field cannot be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productdetail &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This field should contain a detailed description of your product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the regular price of your product, before any sales, discounts, or taxes are applied. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
itemtype &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Item types are: download, donation, physical and monetary. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
catalogs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
These are the catalogs you would like the item to be displayed in. Catalog numbers should be used, separated by semicolons. The catalog number associated with any catalog you have created can be found in your Catalog List in Catalogs section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applysaleprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product is on sale. Allowed values for this field are yes and no. If &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, then productsaleprice must contain a value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productsaleprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If your product is on sale, enter the sale price, without currency symbols. (e.g. 1.99 and not $1.99 or 1.99£) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applymarkas &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicate if you wish to mark this product as sold out, backordered, discontinued, new, or on sale. Allowed values in this field are yes, no, or blank (same as no). If yes, then productmarkas must contain a value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productmarkas &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applymarkas is set to yes, then this field must contain one of the following values: onsale, soldout, backordered, new or discontinued. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productweight &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
The weight of your product. Do not include the unit of measurement (e.g. 1.25 and not 1.25lb or 1.25kg) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productquantity &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the maximum quantity per order, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
producthide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product should be hidden from customers. Applicable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
producthidemainview &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product should be hidden from the main storefront page. Applicable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productthumbnail &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the URL for a thumbnail image of the product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productimage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the URL for the full-size image of the product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
downloadfile &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If the product is downloadable (itemtype is set to download), then you must enter the name of the file. All files must be located in the /esmdownload directory of your domain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applydiscount &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicate if a discount can be applied to this product. Accepted values are yes and no. You can also leave the field blank to indicate no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
orderexceeding &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount &amp;amp;nbsp;is set to yes, indicate the quantity of the product which must be exceeded before a discount is applied. E.g., to apply a discount when 5 or more units are ordered at a time, orderexceeding should be set to 4. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountreceive &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount is set to yes, then indicate the quantity of the discount which should be received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
receivetype &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount is set to yes, then indicate if the amount entered in discountreceive indicates a flat rate or a percentage. Accepted values are flatrate and percent. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountapplymessage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the message which is displayed to customers when a discount is applied. This field is optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountmessage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the message which is displayed to advertise the discount. If you would like to add extra line breaks to your message, use the &amp;amp;lt;BR&amp;amp;gt; tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applystock &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if you wish to track the stock for this product. Acceptable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
warninglevel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the level at which a low stock warning should be emailed to the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
stocklevel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the current stock available for the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
disabletaxes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
To disable taxes for this product, set this field to yes. Otherwise, enter no or leave blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applyprompt1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if a product prompt is needed for this item. Acceptable values are yes, no, or blank (same as no). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptask1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applyprompt1 is set to yes, then indicate what the user must select. (e.g. &amp;quot;What color would you like?&amp;quot;) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptvalue1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the options available for prompttask1, separated by semicolons (e.g. red;green;blue;yellow;black). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applyprompt2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if a second product prompt is needed for this item. Acceptable values are yes, no, or blank (same as no). Cannot be set to yes unless applyprompt1 is also set to yes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptask2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applyprompt2 is set to yes, then indicate what the user must select. (e.g. &amp;quot;What size do you want&amp;quot;)? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptvalue2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the options available for prompttask2, separated by semicolons (e.g. small;medium;large;extra large). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product export  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your current product list as a downloadable CSV file. To export your products, click the &amp;quot;Export&amp;quot; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, enter all contact information for your store. This information will be used by visitors who wish to contact the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order for the store to function correctly, you must enter your Country and State or Province where you physically operate your store from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can hide your mailing address from the storefront by enabling &amp;quot;Hide address/phone in footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can provide a name for your store and upload or link to a store logo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload an image from your computer, click the &amp;quot;browse...&amp;quot; button. Use the window that opens to locate the image on your computer and click &amp;quot;ok&amp;quot;. Click the &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; button to upload the image to your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To link to an image which has already been uploaded or is on a website, enter the URL in the &amp;quot;image path&amp;quot; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Templates  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a template for your store. Store templates affect the color scheme, graphics and specific layout. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can search through the templates by category, by using the drop-down list above the template thumbnails on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To select a template, scroll through the list provided and click on the template of your choice. When selected, your template will be marked with a blue checkmark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the right, some templates will require you to indicate the size of your product images and thumbnails. This information will be used to ensure that your product images will not appear distorted or stretched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store languages  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can indicate which languages you would like your storefront to be available in. On the left is a list of all available languages. Use the dropdown list at the bottom-right to select a default language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To make a language available, click on the green arrow to the left of the language you want to enable. The language will be moved to the &amp;quot;Enabled Languages&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Disable a language by clicking on the green arrow beside the enabled language. The language will be moved back to the list on the left, which displays all unassigned languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order configuration  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You to set up login information for your order processing interface. The order processing interface allows you to view filled and unfilled orders; it is accessed from a separate URL and requires a login. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The login URL and username is displayed at the top of this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a password for your login using the Password and Confirm Password text boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you would like to receive Email Notifications when orders have been made through your store, select &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; and provide an email address where the notifications will be sent to. Sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, will not be transmitted by email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the Language that you would like your order processing interface to use. This setting is separate from whatever language has been set for your storefront.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store settings  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manual or Automatic SKU generation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unit of measurement for Product Weight (if specified in your product information)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Product Sorting and Grouping allows you to specify in what order your catalog items will be displayed. To use product sorting and product grouping, place checkmarks beside &amp;quot;Apply sort&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Apply product&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SSL details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the details of your SSL address. It will be automatically used when customers place orders through your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Catalogs  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section you can create the catalogs you would like to use in your store, e.g. Sporting Goods, Women's Apparel, Electronics, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit a catalog, click on the inspection icon beside the catalog you want to edit. You can edit your catalog information to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a catalog, click the Add (+) button at the top of the catalog list. Enter in all applicable information in the fields to the right, and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Payments'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment types  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate what payment methods your store will accept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Place checkmarks beside the various payment methods you would like to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*For money orders and C.O.D., you should fill out the applicable Instructions section. This is where you explain to customers who they should (for example) make out their money orders to, mailing address and other important details necessary to complete payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note''' that credit cards can only be processed automatically by your store if you set up a merchant account and payment gateway. You will have an opportunity to configure your gateway in the &amp;quot;Payment Gateways&amp;quot; section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Currency  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can indicate which currency you would like to use in your store. To enable a currency, click on the circle to the right of the currency you would like to enable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you do not want to display the currency's symbol, remove the checkmark beside &amp;quot;Include the currency symbol on all store pages&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment gateways  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to set up a payment gateway. Payment gateways are used to automatically process orders paid by credit card. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To use a payment gateway, you must have already set up a merchant account with a compatible gateway provider that you would like to use. Visit the payment gateway provider's main website to set up a merchant account if you have not already done so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To configure a payment gateway, select the gateway you would like to use from the list by clicking on the inspection icon. Fill in your merchant account information on the right (required information will vary by gateway provider).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Please note that the currency used in your store must match the billing currency which will be used by your merchant provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You must also set the gateway's status to &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot;, either by selecting the &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; radio button in the gateway details on the right, or by clicking on the circle beside the gateway you want to enable in the gateway list. A green circle indicates enabled; a gray circle indicates the gateway is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can have more than one payment gateway configured, but only one may be enabled at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings when you are finished configuring your payment gateway. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authorize.net configuration requirements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have obtained an Authorize.net merchant account, you need to make some settings changes to your Authorize.net account to ensure it will work with EasyStoreMaker PRO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Login to your Authorize.net account, at &amp;amp;nbsp;https://secure.authorize.net/ &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link, located midway down the left-hand side of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Virtual Terminal&amp;quot; link on the right-hand side of the page. Do not click on the link with the same name in the top-left corner of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Check all of your field names. Look for any field names which have &amp;amp;nbsp;a checkmark beside them in the &amp;quot;required&amp;quot; category. If you find any, remove the checkmark. When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Settings Main Menu&amp;quot; link. On the page that loads, scroll down and click on the &amp;quot;Address Verification System (AVS)&amp;quot; link, located under the &amp;quot;Security&amp;quot; section. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the Settings menu. Scroll down and look for the SECURITY section, then Address Verification System (AVS) &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure all checkboxes are empty. Click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; when you are done. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Payment Forms&amp;quot;, then &amp;quot;Form Fields&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure all of the &amp;quot;Required&amp;quot; fields are unchecked. If you had to uncheck any boxes, save your settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; menu, click on &amp;quot;Response Receipts&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure the list is empty. Delete any list entries of they exist. Save any changes you have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Authorize.net merchant account has now been properly configured to work with EasyStoreMaker PRO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Please note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Only standard Authorize.net accounts will work with EasyStoreMaker Pro; Authorize.net Secure accounts will not work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store discount  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish, you can use this section to set up a global discount scheme for your store. For example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Orders exceeding $50 receive a 10% discount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Orders exceeding 5 items receive free shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipping methods  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with various shipping methods which customers can select. There are 3 main categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Regional&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*National&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*International&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category can have subcategories, such as standard delivery, overnight, and so on. By default only one shipping method is provided per category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure a shipping method by clicking on the inspection icon (magnifying glass) beside the method, and then entering in appropriate information in the section to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can create a new shipping method under a specific shipping category by clicking the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol beside the applicable category. Next, fill in all applicable information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Instructions text area can be used to indicate the specifics of the shipping method, e.g. &amp;quot;Delivery by regular mail, allow one week for delivery&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tax zones  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tax Zones interface is used to determine when a particular tax should be applied. To add a tax to a specified zone, click on the inspection tool beside the region you want to apply taxes to (for example, to apply a federal tax, add it to your country zone, e.g. &amp;quot;Canada&amp;quot;). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the drop-down menus to select a tax from the list you created in the &amp;quot;Tax Rates&amp;quot; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also indicate if this tax is compounded or added to taxes which may apply to sub-regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your tax settings for that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add other countries or zones within a country by clicking on the applicable &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; button. Enter your tax information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save the tax settings for the new region. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tax summary  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tax summary section lists all tax rules which you have set up using the Tax Rates and Tax Zones interfaces. This list is provided to provide you an overview and spot any potential issues. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customers  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will display a list of customers who have registered at your store. Registered customers can save their personal details (shipping address, credit card number, etc.), which speeds up the process of placing orders through your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can view registered customers' contact information on the right by selecting a customer from the list on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store status  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays useful statistics concerning your store, such as the number of products displayed for sale, number of orders waiting to be processed and number of registered customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Premium_Shopping_Cart&amp;diff=776</id>
		<title>Premium Shopping Cart</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Premium_Shopping_Cart&amp;diff=776"/>
				<updated>2013-04-02T14:50:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This application has been developed to automate the installation process of Premium Shopping Cart. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Install  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install Premium Shopping Cart to a directory you specify.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In order to install the Shopping Cart, click '''Install Shopping Cart'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a database from the drop-down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Administrator account details. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select installation directory or create a new directory. In order to create a new directory, enter the name of the new directory and click '''Create Directory'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' to complete the installation. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Administrator username is set automatically and password must be longer than 8 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Uninstall Shopping Cart  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to uninstall Premium Shopping Cart, click '''Uninstall Shopping Cart '''and follow the steps within the un-installation wizard. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= SSL =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Switch the SSL type to either : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#'''Vanity SSL''' or '''Free SSL '''&lt;br /&gt;
#Then click '''next '''to complete the change. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= View Shopping Cart =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to view your Shopping Cart, click '''View Shopping Cart'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Administrate Shopping Cart  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to manage your shopping cart click '''Administrate Shopping Cart'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;lt;a _fcknotitle=&amp;quot;true&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;Category:Setup&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;Setup&amp;amp;lt;/a&amp;amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasyStoreMaker&amp;diff=775</id>
		<title>EasyStoreMaker</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasyStoreMaker&amp;diff=775"/>
				<updated>2013-04-02T14:25:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Message details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= '''Introduction'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EasyStoreMaker Pro is a world-class online ecommerce tool that allows you to create a dynamic storefront and profitable online business. With the assistance of EasyStoreMaker Pro’s tools and setup wizards, you can easily incorporate a variety of payment gateways, product catalogues, international currencies, local tax calculations, shipping and handling calculations, language conversions, and auto messaging. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Expand your footprint and be available to your customers and prospects 24/7 by using EasyStoreMaker Pro today. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Using the main menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu provides you with an easy way to access the various sections of ESM Pro's interfaces.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Configuration Wizard''' guides you through the initial set-up process. You can also use the wizard to change your existing settings. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Store Configuration''' allows you to access specific parts of the store's configuration interface. This option can be used to manually set up your store, or jump directly to a portion of the configuration interface to make settings changes. &lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Add Product Wizard''' is a convenient quick link to add products to your store, taking you directly to the Product configuration menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Order Management''' takes you to the order processing interface, where you can view orders which are awaiting shipment. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''View Store''' opens a new window which displays your store in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would rather go directly to the Store Configuration interface when you run ESM Pro, place a checkmark beside &amp;quot;Do not show me this again. Go directly to my home page on next startup&amp;quot; (located at the bottom of the screen).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have done this and want to see this page again, click the &amp;quot;getting started&amp;quot; link at the top of the screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Configuration Wizard'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this first step, enter all contact information for your store. This information will be used by visitors to your website who wish to contact the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the store to function correctly, you must enter your Country and State or Province where you physically operate your store from. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can hide your mailing address from the storefront by enabling &amp;quot;Hide address/phone in footer&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished filling in your contact information, click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can provide a name for your store and upload or link to a store logo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload an image from your computer, click the &amp;quot;browse...&amp;quot; button. Use the window that opens to locate the image on your computer and click &amp;quot;ok&amp;quot;. Click the &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; button to upload the image to your store. &lt;br /&gt;
*To link to an image which has already been uploaded or is on a website, enter the URL in the &amp;quot;image path&amp;quot; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Message details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with customizable messages which are displayed to customers in specific situations. You can at your discretion fill them in or leave them blank; your store will still function properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Introduction Message will be displayed on your storefront's main page &lt;br /&gt;
*The Thank You Message is displayed whenever a customer successfully places an order at your store. You can also include the Thank You Message in any email confirmations the store sends to customers by selecting the &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; radio button directly beneath the Thank You Message text area.&lt;br /&gt;
*The Maintenance Message will be displayed when an order cannot be completed for some reason. &lt;br /&gt;
*The Download File Message is displayed to customers who purchase a downloadable product from your store. &lt;br /&gt;
*The Disclaimer Notice and Privacy Statement text areas are disabled by default. If you wish to have links at the bottom of your store's pages which will display a Disclaimer Notice and/or Privacy Statement, check the box beside the applicable message areas and enter your text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store setting details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manual or Automatic SKU generation. &lt;br /&gt;
*Unit of measurement for Product Weight (if specified in your product information) &lt;br /&gt;
*Product Sorting and Grouping allows you to specify in what order your catalog items will be displayed. To use product sorting and product grouping, place checkmarks beside &amp;quot;Apply sort&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Apply product&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.When creating a new product, you have the choice of using a custom SKU number or an automatically generated SKU (Stock Keeping Unit: a serial number that identifies this specific product) number. Please choose the corresponding radio button: Custom or automatic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Choose a unit weight of your product by clicking on the corresponding radio button: lbs, kg, oz or g.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Sort your products as explained below under “Sort Products”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Group your products as explained below under “Group Products”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Click “Next” to proceed to the next step&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.Click “Previous” to go back to the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order configuration details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step allows you to set up log in information for your order processing interface. The order processing interface allows you to view filled and unfilled orders; it is accessed from a separate URL and requires a login. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The login URL and username is displayed at the top of this section. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select a password for your login using the Password and Confirm Password text boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
*If you would like to receive Email Notifications when orders have been made through your store, select &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; and provide an email address where the notifications will be sent to. Sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, will not be transmitted by email. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select the Language that you would like your order processing interface to use. This setting is separate from whatever language has been set for your storefront.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment type details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate what payment methods your store will accept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Place checkmarks beside the various payment methods you would like to accept. &lt;br /&gt;
*For money orders and C.O.D., you should fill out the applicable Instructions section. This is where you explain to customers who they should (for example) make out their money orders to, mailing address and other important details necessary to complete payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note''' that credit cards can only be processed automatically by your store if you set up a merchant account and payment gateway. You will have an opportunity to configure your gateway in the “Payment Gateways” section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Currency details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency Details section allows you to indicate which currency you would like to use in your store. To enable a currency, click on the enable/disable icon to the right of the currency you would like to enable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to display the currency's symbol, remove the checkmark beside &amp;quot;Include the currency symbol on all store pages&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipping methods  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with various shipping methods which customers can select. There are 3 main categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Regional &lt;br /&gt;
*National&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*International&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category can have subcategories, such as standard delivery, overnight, etc. By default only one shipping method is provided per category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure a shipping method by clicking on the inspection icon (magnifying glass) beside the method, and then entering appropriate information in the section to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can create a new shipping method under a specific shipping category by clicking the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol beside the applicable category. Next, fill in all applicable information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Instructions text area can be used to indicate the specifics of the shipping method, e.g. &amp;quot;Delivery by regular mail, allow one week for delivery&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Templates  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, you can select a template for your store. Store templates affect the color scheme, graphics and specific layout of your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can search through the templates by category, by using the drop-down list above the template thumbnails on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To select a template, scroll through the list provided and click on the template of your choice. When selected, your template will be marked with a blue checkmark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the right, some templates will require you to indicate the size of your product images and thumbnails. This information will be used to ensure that your product images will not appear distorted or stretched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration completed  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your configuration is now complete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Your store has now been configured for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is your first time running the wizard, you will still need to add products to your store for sale; if you wish to automate the process of charging credit cards, you will also need to configure a merchant account (found under the &amp;quot;store configuration&amp;quot; section)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can click the link provided in the centre of the screen to begin adding products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you wish to add products at a later date, click &amp;quot;finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Store Management'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product management  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all products are displayed in the Product Management section. Using the drop-down lists provided, you can display products found in specific catalogs, and sort the order of their display by product name or SKU number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new product, click the Add button (+) located at the top of the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When adding a new product, several sections appear below the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Under Product details, fill in all essential information, such as name, description, SKU number, and Price. You can also set the weight, sale price (click checkmark to apply sale price) and maximum quantity per order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product Prompt section allows you to fill in additional options for your item, such as size or color. To add a prompt, click on the inspection tool beside the first prompt (or second prompt if you have already added one), and fill in the applicable options (e.g. small,medium,large). Click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot; to apply your prompt settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product Images section allows you to specify images of your product, which will be displayed in your store. You can have multiple images set up for a single product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product discount section can be used to set up a discount on your item when a certain quantity of your product has been ordered. Examples: $5.00 off when 3 or more items are purchased; 30% off when more than 10 items are purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can track your Product stock level by filling in the current stock level in the section provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can indicate which catalogs you would like this item to be placed in using the Assign to catalogs section. On the left is a list of all available catalogs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to add your product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product import  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can upload a CSV file which contains data for all of your products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to fill in the CSV file correctly, use the link provided in this section to download a CSV template, which also contains sample products. You can open and edit CSV files in most spreadsheet programs, such as OpenOffice Calc and Microsoft Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload your CSV file, click the &amp;quot;browse&amp;quot; button and use the window that opens to locate your CSV file on your computer. Click &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; to upload your CSV file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CSV file format''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first row of your CSV file should be a &amp;quot;header row&amp;quot;. This row is used as a placeholder, so you can see what kind of information should be located in each column. As EasyStoreMaker is expacting your CSV file to have a header row, it should be present. If it is not, then the first product in your CSV file will be skipped, as it will be in the location that the header row belonged in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header row should contain the following headings, in the order listed (explanations follow): &amp;amp;lt;script language=&amp;quot;JavaScript&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;!-- if ((navigator.appName == &amp;quot;Netscape&amp;quot;) &amp;amp;amp;&amp;amp;amp; (parseInt(navigator.appVersion) == 4)) document.write(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;lt;/table&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;table x-use-null-cells cellspacing='0' width='100%' border='1' bordercolor='black' bordercolorlight='black' bordercolordark='black'&amp;amp;gt;&amp;quot;); //--&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/script&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs4&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs6&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Name &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
! width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs7&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Explanation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
skuname &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter the SKU number of your product. SKU numbers may be a combination of numbers (0-9), dashes (-), or underscores(_), up to a maximum of 25 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you have set your store to automatically generate SKU numbers, then this field should be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productname &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of your product. This field cannot be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productdetail &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This field should contain a detailed description of your product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the regular price of your product, before any sales, discounts, or taxes are applied. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
itemtype &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Item types are: download, donation, physical and monetary. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
catalogs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
These are the catalogs you would like the item to be displayed in. Catalog numbers should be used, separated by semicolons. The catalog number associated with any catalog you have created can be found in your Catalog List in Catalogs section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applysaleprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product is on sale. Allowed values for this field are yes and no. If &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, then productsaleprice must contain a value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productsaleprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If your product is on sale, enter the sale price, without currency symbols. (e.g. 1.99 and not $1.99 or 1.99£) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applymarkas &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicate if you wish to mark this product as sold out, backordered, discontinued, new, or on sale. Allowed values in this field are yes, no, or blank (same as no). If yes, then productmarkas must contain a value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productmarkas &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applymarkas is set to yes, then this field must contain one of the following values: onsale, soldout, backordered, new or discontinued. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productweight &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
The weight of your product. Do not include the unit of measurement (e.g. 1.25 and not 1.25lb or 1.25kg) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productquantity &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the maximum quantity per order, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
producthide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product should be hidden from customers. Applicable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
producthidemainview &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product should be hidden from the main storefront page. Applicable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productthumbnail &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the URL for a thumbnail image of the product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productimage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the URL for the full-size image of the product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
downloadfile &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If the product is downloadable (itemtype is set to download), then you must enter the name of the file. All files must be located in the /esmdownload directory of your domain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applydiscount &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicate if a discount can be applied to this product. Accepted values are yes and no. You can also leave the field blank to indicate no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
orderexceeding &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount &amp;amp;nbsp;is set to yes, indicate the quantity of the product which must be exceeded before a discount is applied. E.g., to apply a discount when 5 or more units are ordered at a time, orderexceeding should be set to 4. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountreceive &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount is set to yes, then indicate the quantity of the discount which should be received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
receivetype &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount is set to yes, then indicate if the amount entered in discountreceive indicates a flat rate or a percentage. Accepted values are flatrate and percent. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountapplymessage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the message which is displayed to customers when a discount is applied. This field is optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountmessage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the message which is displayed to advertise the discount. If you would like to add extra line breaks to your message, use the &amp;amp;lt;BR&amp;amp;gt; tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applystock &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if you wish to track the stock for this product. Acceptable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
warninglevel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the level at which a low stock warning should be emailed to the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
stocklevel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the current stock available for the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
disabletaxes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
To disable taxes for this product, set this field to yes. Otherwise, enter no or leave blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applyprompt1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if a product prompt is needed for this item. Acceptable values are yes, no, or blank (same as no). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptask1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applyprompt1 is set to yes, then indicate what the user must select. (e.g. &amp;quot;What color would you like?&amp;quot;) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptvalue1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the options available for prompttask1, separated by semicolons (e.g. red;green;blue;yellow;black). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applyprompt2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if a second product prompt is needed for this item. Acceptable values are yes, no, or blank (same as no). Cannot be set to yes unless applyprompt1 is also set to yes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptask2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applyprompt2 is set to yes, then indicate what the user must select. (e.g. &amp;quot;What size do you want&amp;quot;)? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptvalue2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the options available for prompttask2, separated by semicolons (e.g. small;medium;large;extra large). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product export  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your current product list as a downloadable CSV file. To export your products, click the &amp;quot;Export&amp;quot; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, enter all contact information for your store. This information will be used by visitors who wish to contact the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order for the store to function correctly, you must enter your Country and State or Province where you physically operate your store from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can hide your mailing address from the storefront by enabling &amp;quot;Hide address/phone in footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can provide a name for your store and upload or link to a store logo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload an image from your computer, click the &amp;quot;browse...&amp;quot; button. Use the window that opens to locate the image on your computer and click &amp;quot;ok&amp;quot;. Click the &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; button to upload the image to your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To link to an image which has already been uploaded or is on a website, enter the URL in the &amp;quot;image path&amp;quot; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Templates  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a template for your store. Store templates affect the color scheme, graphics and specific layout. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can search through the templates by category, by using the drop-down list above the template thumbnails on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To select a template, scroll through the list provided and click on the template of your choice. When selected, your template will be marked with a blue checkmark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the right, some templates will require you to indicate the size of your product images and thumbnails. This information will be used to ensure that your product images will not appear distorted or stretched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; we you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store languages  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can indicate which languages you would like your storefront to be available in. On the left is a list of all available languages. Use the dropdown list at the bottom-right to select a default language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To make a language available, click on the green arrow to the left of the language you want to enable. The language will be moved to the &amp;quot;Enabled Languages&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Disable a language by clicking on the green arrow beside the enabled language. The language will be moved back to the list on the left, which displays all unassigned languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order configuration  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You to set up login information for your order processing interface. The order processing interface allows you to view filled and unfilled orders; it is accessed from a separate URL and requires a login. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The login URL and username is displayed at the top of this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a password for your login using the Password and Confirm Password text boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you would like to receive Email Notifications when orders have been made through your store, select &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; and provide an email address where the notifications will be sent to. Sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, will not be transmitted by email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the Language that you would like your order processing interface to use. This setting is separate from whatever language has been set for your storefront.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store settings  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manual or Automatic SKU generation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unit of measurement for Product Weight (if specified in your product information)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Product Sorting and Grouping allows you to specify in what order your catalog items will be displayed. To use product sorting and product grouping, place checkmarks beside &amp;quot;Apply sort&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Apply product&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SSL details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the details of your SSL address. It will be automatically used when customers place orders through your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Catalogs  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section you can create the catalogs you would like to use in your store, e.g. Sporting Goods, Women's Apparel, Electronics, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit a catalog, click on the inspection icon beside the catalog you want to edit. You can edit your catalog information to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a catalog, click the Add (+) button at the top of the catalog list. Enter in all applicable information in the fields to the right, and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Payments'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment types  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate what payment methods your store will accept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Place checkmarks beside the various payment methods you would like to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*For money orders and C.O.D., you should fill out the applicable Instructions section. This is where you explain to customers who they should (for example) make out their money orders to, mailing address and other important details necessary to complete payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note''' that credit cards can only be processed automatically by your store if you set up a merchant account and payment gateway. You will have an opportunity to configure your gateway in the &amp;quot;Payment Gateways&amp;quot; section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Currency  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can indicate which currency you would like to use in your store. To enable a currency, click on the circle to the right of the currency you would like to enable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you do not want to display the currency's symbol, remove the checkmark beside &amp;quot;Include the currency symbol on all store pages&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment gateways  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to set up a payment gateway. Payment gateways are used to automatically process orders paid by credit card. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To use a payment gateway, you must have already set up a merchant account with a compatible gateway provider that you would like to use. Visit the payment gateway provider's main website to set up a merchant account if you have not already done so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To configure a payment gateway, select the gateway you would like to use from the list by clicking on the inspection icon. Fill in your merchant account information on the right (required information will vary by gateway provider).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Please note that the currency used in your store must match the billing currency which will be used by your merchant provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You must also set the gateway's status to &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot;, either by selecting the &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; radio button in the gateway details on the right, or by clicking on the circle beside the gateway you want to enable in the gateway list. A green circle indicates enabled; a gray circle indicates the gateway is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can have more than one payment gateway configured, but only one may be enabled at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings when you are finished configuring your payment gateway. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authorize.net configuration requirements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have obtained an Authorize.net merchant account, you need to make some settings changes to your Authorize.net account to ensure it will work with EasyStoreMaker PRO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Login to your Authorize.net account, at &amp;amp;nbsp;https://secure.authorize.net/ &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link, located midway down the left-hand side of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Virtual Terminal&amp;quot; link on the right-hand side of the page. Do not click on the link with the same name in the top-left corner of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Check all of your field names. Look for any field names which have &amp;amp;nbsp;a checkmark beside them in the &amp;quot;required&amp;quot; category. If you find any, remove the checkmark. When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Settings Main Menu&amp;quot; link. On the page that loads, scroll down and click on the &amp;quot;Address Verification System (AVS)&amp;quot; link, located under the &amp;quot;Security&amp;quot; section. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the Settings menu. Scroll down and look for the SECURITY section, then Address Verification System (AVS) &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure all checkboxes are empty. Click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; when you are done. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Payment Forms&amp;quot;, then &amp;quot;Form Fields&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure all of the &amp;quot;Required&amp;quot; fields are unchecked. If you had to uncheck any boxes, save your settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; menu, click on &amp;quot;Response Receipts&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure the list is empty. Delete any list entries of they exist. Save any changes you have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Authorize.net merchant account has now been properly configured to work with EasyStoreMaker PRO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Please note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Only standard Authorize.net accounts will work with EasyStoreMaker Pro; Authorize.net Secure accounts will not work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store discount  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish, you can use this section to set up a global discount scheme for your store. For example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Orders exceeding $50 receive a 10% discount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Orders exceeding 5 items receive free shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipping methods  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with various shipping methods which customers can select. There are 3 main categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Regional&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*National&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*International&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category can have subcategories, such as standard delivery, overnight, and so on. By default only one shipping method is provided per category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure a shipping method by clicking on the inspection icon (magnifying glass) beside the method, and then entering in appropriate information in the section to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can create a new shipping method under a specific shipping category by clicking the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol beside the applicable category. Next, fill in all applicable information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Instructions text area can be used to indicate the specifics of the shipping method, e.g. &amp;quot;Delivery by regular mail, allow one week for delivery&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tax zones  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tax Zones interface is used to determine when a particular tax should be applied. To add a tax to a specified zone, click on the inspection tool beside the region you want to apply taxes to (for example, to apply a federal tax, add it to your country zone, e.g. &amp;quot;Canada&amp;quot;). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the drop-down menus to select a tax from the list you created in the &amp;quot;Tax Rates&amp;quot; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also indicate if this tax is compounded or added to taxes which may apply to sub-regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your tax settings for that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add other countries or zones within a country by clicking on the applicable &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; button. Enter your tax information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save the tax settings for the new region. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tax summary  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tax summary section lists all tax rules which you have set up using the Tax Rates and Tax Zones interfaces. This list is provided to provide you an overview and spot any potential issues. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customers  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will display a list of customers who have registered at your store. Registered customers can save their personal details (shipping address, credit card number, etc.), which speeds up the process of placing orders through your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can view registered customers' contact information on the right by selecting a customer from the list on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store status  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays useful statistics concerning your store, such as the number of products displayed for sale, number of orders waiting to be processed and number of registered customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasyStoreMaker&amp;diff=774</id>
		<title>EasyStoreMaker</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=EasyStoreMaker&amp;diff=774"/>
				<updated>2013-04-02T14:23:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Store setting details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= '''Introduction'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
EasyStoreMaker Pro is a world-class online ecommerce tool that allows you to create a dynamic storefront and profitable online business. With the assistance of EasyStoreMaker Pro’s tools and setup wizards, you can easily incorporate a variety of payment gateways, product catalogues, international currencies, local tax calculations, shipping and handling calculations, language conversions, and auto messaging. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Expand your footprint and be available to your customers and prospects 24/7 by using EasyStoreMaker Pro today. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Using the main menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main menu provides you with an easy way to access the various sections of ESM Pro's interfaces.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Configuration Wizard''' guides you through the initial set-up process. You can also use the wizard to change your existing settings. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Store Configuration''' allows you to access specific parts of the store's configuration interface. This option can be used to manually set up your store, or jump directly to a portion of the configuration interface to make settings changes. &lt;br /&gt;
*The '''Add Product Wizard''' is a convenient quick link to add products to your store, taking you directly to the Product configuration menu. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Order Management''' takes you to the order processing interface, where you can view orders which are awaiting shipment. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''View Store''' opens a new window which displays your store in its current state.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you would rather go directly to the Store Configuration interface when you run ESM Pro, place a checkmark beside &amp;quot;Do not show me this again. Go directly to my home page on next startup&amp;quot; (located at the bottom of the screen).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you have done this and want to see this page again, click the &amp;quot;getting started&amp;quot; link at the top of the screen.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Configuration Wizard'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this first step, enter all contact information for your store. This information will be used by visitors to your website who wish to contact the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order for the store to function correctly, you must enter your Country and State or Province where you physically operate your store from. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can hide your mailing address from the storefront by enabling &amp;quot;Hide address/phone in footer&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have finished filling in your contact information, click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can provide a name for your store and upload or link to a store logo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload an image from your computer, click the &amp;quot;browse...&amp;quot; button. Use the window that opens to locate the image on your computer and click &amp;quot;ok&amp;quot;. Click the &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; button to upload the image to your store. &lt;br /&gt;
*To link to an image which has already been uploaded or is on a website, enter the URL in the &amp;quot;image path&amp;quot; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Message details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with customizable messages which are displayed to customers in specific situations. You can at your discretion fill them in or leave them blank; your store will still function properly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Introduction Message will be displayed on your storefront's main page &lt;br /&gt;
*The Thank You Message is displayed whenever a customer successfully places an order at your store. You can also include the thank you message in any email confirmations the store sends to customers by selecting the &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot; radio button directly beneath the Thank You message text area.&lt;br /&gt;
*The Maintenance Message will be displayed when an order cannot be completed for some reason. &lt;br /&gt;
*The Download File Message is displayed to customers who purchase a downloadable product from your store. &lt;br /&gt;
*The Disclaimer Notice and Privacy Statement text areas are disabled by default. If you wish to have links at the bottom of your store's pages which will display a Disclaimer Notice and/or Privacy Statement, check the box beside the applicable message areas and enter your text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store setting details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manual or Automatic SKU generation. &lt;br /&gt;
*Unit of measurement for Product Weight (if specified in your product information) &lt;br /&gt;
*Product Sorting and Grouping allows you to specify in what order your catalog items will be displayed. To use product sorting and product grouping, place checkmarks beside &amp;quot;Apply sort&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Apply product&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.When creating a new product, you have the choice of using a custom SKU number or an automatically generated SKU (Stock Keeping Unit: a serial number that identifies this specific product) number. Please choose the corresponding radio button: Custom or automatic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Choose a unit weight of your product by clicking on the corresponding radio button: lbs, kg, oz or g.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Sort your products as explained below under “Sort Products”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Group your products as explained below under “Group Products”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Click “Next” to proceed to the next step&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6.Click “Previous” to go back to the previous step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order configuration details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This step allows you to set up log in information for your order processing interface. The order processing interface allows you to view filled and unfilled orders; it is accessed from a separate URL and requires a login. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The login URL and username is displayed at the top of this section. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select a password for your login using the Password and Confirm Password text boxes. &lt;br /&gt;
*If you would like to receive Email Notifications when orders have been made through your store, select &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; and provide an email address where the notifications will be sent to. Sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, will not be transmitted by email. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select the Language that you would like your order processing interface to use. This setting is separate from whatever language has been set for your storefront.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment type details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate what payment methods your store will accept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Place checkmarks beside the various payment methods you would like to accept. &lt;br /&gt;
*For money orders and C.O.D., you should fill out the applicable Instructions section. This is where you explain to customers who they should (for example) make out their money orders to, mailing address and other important details necessary to complete payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note''' that credit cards can only be processed automatically by your store if you set up a merchant account and payment gateway. You will have an opportunity to configure your gateway in the “Payment Gateways” section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Currency details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Currency Details section allows you to indicate which currency you would like to use in your store. To enable a currency, click on the enable/disable icon to the right of the currency you would like to enable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you do not want to display the currency's symbol, remove the checkmark beside &amp;quot;Include the currency symbol on all store pages&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipping methods  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with various shipping methods which customers can select. There are 3 main categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Regional &lt;br /&gt;
*National&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*International&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category can have subcategories, such as standard delivery, overnight, etc. By default only one shipping method is provided per category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure a shipping method by clicking on the inspection icon (magnifying glass) beside the method, and then entering appropriate information in the section to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can create a new shipping method under a specific shipping category by clicking the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol beside the applicable category. Next, fill in all applicable information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Instructions text area can be used to indicate the specifics of the shipping method, e.g. &amp;quot;Delivery by regular mail, allow one week for delivery&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;next&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Templates  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, you can select a template for your store. Store templates affect the color scheme, graphics and specific layout of your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can search through the templates by category, by using the drop-down list above the template thumbnails on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To select a template, scroll through the list provided and click on the template of your choice. When selected, your template will be marked with a blue checkmark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the right, some templates will require you to indicate the size of your product images and thumbnails. This information will be used to ensure that your product images will not appear distorted or stretched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuration completed  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your configuration is now complete. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Your store has now been configured for use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If this is your first time running the wizard, you will still need to add products to your store for sale; if you wish to automate the process of charging credit cards, you will also need to configure a merchant account (found under the &amp;quot;store configuration&amp;quot; section)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can click the link provided in the centre of the screen to begin adding products.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you wish to add products at a later date, click &amp;quot;finish&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Store Management'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product management  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all products are displayed in the Product Management section. Using the drop-down lists provided, you can display products found in specific catalogs, and sort the order of their display by product name or SKU number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new product, click the Add button (+) located at the top of the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When adding a new product, several sections appear below the list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Under Product details, fill in all essential information, such as name, description, SKU number, and Price. You can also set the weight, sale price (click checkmark to apply sale price) and maximum quantity per order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product Prompt section allows you to fill in additional options for your item, such as size or color. To add a prompt, click on the inspection tool beside the first prompt (or second prompt if you have already added one), and fill in the applicable options (e.g. small,medium,large). Click &amp;quot;update&amp;quot; to apply your prompt settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product Images section allows you to specify images of your product, which will be displayed in your store. You can have multiple images set up for a single product.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Product discount section can be used to set up a discount on your item when a certain quantity of your product has been ordered. Examples: $5.00 off when 3 or more items are purchased; 30% off when more than 10 items are purchased.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can track your Product stock level by filling in the current stock level in the section provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can indicate which catalogs you would like this item to be placed in using the Assign to catalogs section. On the left is a list of all available catalogs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to add your product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product import  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can upload a CSV file which contains data for all of your products. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order to fill in the CSV file correctly, use the link provided in this section to download a CSV template, which also contains sample products. You can open and edit CSV files in most spreadsheet programs, such as OpenOffice Calc and Microsoft Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload your CSV file, click the &amp;quot;browse&amp;quot; button and use the window that opens to locate your CSV file on your computer. Click &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; to upload your CSV file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''CSV file format''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first row of your CSV file should be a &amp;quot;header row&amp;quot;. This row is used as a placeholder, so you can see what kind of information should be located in each column. As EasyStoreMaker is expacting your CSV file to have a header row, it should be present. If it is not, then the first product in your CSV file will be skipped, as it will be in the location that the header row belonged in. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The header row should contain the following headings, in the order listed (explanations follow): &amp;amp;lt;script language=&amp;quot;JavaScript&amp;quot;&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;!-- if ((navigator.appName == &amp;quot;Netscape&amp;quot;) &amp;amp;amp;&amp;amp;amp; (parseInt(navigator.appVersion) == 4)) document.write(&amp;quot;&amp;amp;lt;/table&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;table x-use-null-cells cellspacing='0' width='100%' border='1' bordercolor='black' bordercolorlight='black' bordercolordark='black'&amp;amp;gt;&amp;quot;); //--&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;/script&amp;amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| cellspacing=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs4&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs6&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Name &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
! width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs7&amp;quot; scope=&amp;quot;col&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Explanation &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
skuname &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is where you enter the SKU number of your product. SKU numbers may be a combination of numbers (0-9), dashes (-), or underscores(_), up to a maximum of 25 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you have set your store to automatically generate SKU numbers, then this field should be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productname &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the name of your product. This field cannot be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productdetail &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This field should contain a detailed description of your product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the regular price of your product, before any sales, discounts, or taxes are applied. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
itemtype &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Item types are: download, donation, physical and monetary. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
catalogs &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
These are the catalogs you would like the item to be displayed in. Catalog numbers should be used, separated by semicolons. The catalog number associated with any catalog you have created can be found in your Catalog List in Catalogs section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applysaleprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product is on sale. Allowed values for this field are yes and no. If &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;, then productsaleprice must contain a value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productsaleprice &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If your product is on sale, enter the sale price, without currency symbols. (e.g. 1.99 and not $1.99 or 1.99£) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applymarkas &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicate if you wish to mark this product as sold out, backordered, discontinued, new, or on sale. Allowed values in this field are yes, no, or blank (same as no). If yes, then productmarkas must contain a value. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productmarkas &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applymarkas is set to yes, then this field must contain one of the following values: onsale, soldout, backordered, new or discontinued. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productweight &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
The weight of your product. Do not include the unit of measurement (e.g. 1.25 and not 1.25lb or 1.25kg) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productquantity &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the maximum quantity per order, if applicable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
producthide &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product should be hidden from customers. Applicable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
producthidemainview &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if the product should be hidden from the main storefront page. Applicable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productthumbnail &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the URL for a thumbnail image of the product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
productimage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the URL for the full-size image of the product. This field can be left blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
downloadfile &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If the product is downloadable (itemtype is set to download), then you must enter the name of the file. All files must be located in the /esmdownload directory of your domain. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applydiscount &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicate if a discount can be applied to this product. Accepted values are yes and no. You can also leave the field blank to indicate no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
orderexceeding &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount &amp;amp;nbsp;is set to yes, indicate the quantity of the product which must be exceeded before a discount is applied. E.g., to apply a discount when 5 or more units are ordered at a time, orderexceeding should be set to 4. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountreceive &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount is set to yes, then indicate the quantity of the discount which should be received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
receivetype &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applydiscount is set to yes, then indicate if the amount entered in discountreceive indicates a flat rate or a percentage. Accepted values are flatrate and percent. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountapplymessage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the message which is displayed to customers when a discount is applied. This field is optional. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
discountmessage &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
This is the message which is displayed to advertise the discount. If you would like to add extra line breaks to your message, use the &amp;amp;lt;BR&amp;amp;gt; tag. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applystock &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if you wish to track the stock for this product. Acceptable values are yes and no. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
warninglevel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the level at which a low stock warning should be emailed to the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
stocklevel &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates the current stock available for the product. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
disabletaxes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
To disable taxes for this product, set this field to yes. Otherwise, enter no or leave blank. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applyprompt1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if a product prompt is needed for this item. Acceptable values are yes, no, or blank (same as no). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptask1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applyprompt1 is set to yes, then indicate what the user must select. (e.g. &amp;quot;What color would you like?&amp;quot;) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptvalue1 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the options available for prompttask1, separated by semicolons (e.g. red;green;blue;yellow;black). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
applyprompt2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Indicates if a second product prompt is needed for this item. Acceptable values are yes, no, or blank (same as no). Cannot be set to yes unless applyprompt1 is also set to yes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptask2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; rowspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; colspan=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
If applyprompt2 is set to yes, then indicate what the user must select. (e.g. &amp;quot;What size do you want&amp;quot;)? &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|- valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs8&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
promptvalue2 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
| width=&amp;quot;50%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;whs9&amp;quot; | &lt;br /&gt;
Enter the options available for prompttask2, separated by semicolons (e.g. small;medium;large;extra large). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Product export  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your current product list as a downloadable CSV file. To export your products, click the &amp;quot;Export&amp;quot; button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, enter all contact information for your store. This information will be used by visitors who wish to contact the store owner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In order for the store to function correctly, you must enter your Country and State or Province where you physically operate your store from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can hide your mailing address from the storefront by enabling &amp;quot;Hide address/phone in footer&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can provide a name for your store and upload or link to a store logo. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To upload an image from your computer, click the &amp;quot;browse...&amp;quot; button. Use the window that opens to locate the image on your computer and click &amp;quot;ok&amp;quot;. Click the &amp;quot;upload&amp;quot; button to upload the image to your store.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To link to an image which has already been uploaded or is on a website, enter the URL in the &amp;quot;image path&amp;quot; text box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Templates  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can select a template for your store. Store templates affect the color scheme, graphics and specific layout. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can search through the templates by category, by using the drop-down list above the template thumbnails on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To select a template, scroll through the list provided and click on the template of your choice. When selected, your template will be marked with a blue checkmark.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the right, some templates will require you to indicate the size of your product images and thumbnails. This information will be used to ensure that your product images will not appear distorted or stretched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Next&amp;quot; we you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store languages  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can indicate which languages you would like your storefront to be available in. On the left is a list of all available languages. Use the dropdown list at the bottom-right to select a default language. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To make a language available, click on the green arrow to the left of the language you want to enable. The language will be moved to the &amp;quot;Enabled Languages&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Disable a language by clicking on the green arrow beside the enabled language. The language will be moved back to the list on the left, which displays all unassigned languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order configuration  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You to set up login information for your order processing interface. The order processing interface allows you to view filled and unfilled orders; it is accessed from a separate URL and requires a login. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The login URL and username is displayed at the top of this section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select a password for your login using the Password and Confirm Password text boxes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you would like to receive Email Notifications when orders have been made through your store, select &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; and provide an email address where the notifications will be sent to. Sensitive information, such as credit card numbers, will not be transmitted by email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the Language that you would like your order processing interface to use. This setting is separate from whatever language has been set for your storefront.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store settings  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate the following: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manual or Automatic SKU generation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Unit of measurement for Product Weight (if specified in your product information)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Product Sorting and Grouping allows you to specify in what order your catalog items will be displayed. To use product sorting and product grouping, place checkmarks beside &amp;quot;Apply sort&amp;quot; and/or &amp;quot;Apply product&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SSL details  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays the details of your SSL address. It will be automatically used when customers place orders through your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Catalogs  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section you can create the catalogs you would like to use in your store, e.g. Sporting Goods, Women's Apparel, Electronics, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit a catalog, click on the inspection icon beside the catalog you want to edit. You can edit your catalog information to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a catalog, click the Add (+) button at the top of the catalog list. Enter in all applicable information in the fields to the right, and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= '''Payments'''  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment types  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can indicate what payment methods your store will accept. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Place checkmarks beside the various payment methods you would like to accept.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*For money orders and C.O.D., you should fill out the applicable Instructions section. This is where you explain to customers who they should (for example) make out their money orders to, mailing address and other important details necessary to complete payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Please note''' that credit cards can only be processed automatically by your store if you set up a merchant account and payment gateway. You will have an opportunity to configure your gateway in the &amp;quot;Payment Gateways&amp;quot; section. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Currency  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can indicate which currency you would like to use in your store. To enable a currency, click on the circle to the right of the currency you would like to enable. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you do not want to display the currency's symbol, remove the checkmark beside &amp;quot;Include the currency symbol on all store pages&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Apply&amp;quot; when you are finished. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Payment gateways  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section allows you to set up a payment gateway. Payment gateways are used to automatically process orders paid by credit card. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To use a payment gateway, you must have already set up a merchant account with a compatible gateway provider that you would like to use. Visit the payment gateway provider's main website to set up a merchant account if you have not already done so.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*To configure a payment gateway, select the gateway you would like to use from the list by clicking on the inspection icon. Fill in your merchant account information on the right (required information will vary by gateway provider).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Please note that the currency used in your store must match the billing currency which will be used by your merchant provider.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You must also set the gateway's status to &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot;, either by selecting the &amp;quot;enable&amp;quot; radio button in the gateway details on the right, or by clicking on the circle beside the gateway you want to enable in the gateway list. A green circle indicates enabled; a gray circle indicates the gateway is disabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can have more than one payment gateway configured, but only one may be enabled at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings when you are finished configuring your payment gateway. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Authorize.net configuration requirements  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have obtained an Authorize.net merchant account, you need to make some settings changes to your Authorize.net account to ensure it will work with EasyStoreMaker PRO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Login to your Authorize.net account, at &amp;amp;nbsp;https://secure.authorize.net/ &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; link, located midway down the left-hand side of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Virtual Terminal&amp;quot; link on the right-hand side of the page. Do not click on the link with the same name in the top-left corner of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
#Check all of your field names. Look for any field names which have &amp;amp;nbsp;a checkmark beside them in the &amp;quot;required&amp;quot; category. If you find any, remove the checkmark. When you are finished, click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the &amp;quot;Settings Main Menu&amp;quot; link. On the page that loads, scroll down and click on the &amp;quot;Address Verification System (AVS)&amp;quot; link, located under the &amp;quot;Security&amp;quot; section. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the Settings menu. Scroll down and look for the SECURITY section, then Address Verification System (AVS) &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure all checkboxes are empty. Click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; when you are done. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click on &amp;quot;Payment Forms&amp;quot;, then &amp;quot;Form Fields&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure all of the &amp;quot;Required&amp;quot; fields are unchecked. If you had to uncheck any boxes, save your settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#Go back to the &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; menu, click on &amp;quot;Response Receipts&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Make sure the list is empty. Delete any list entries of they exist. Save any changes you have made.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your Authorize.net merchant account has now been properly configured to work with EasyStoreMaker PRO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Please note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Only standard Authorize.net accounts will work with EasyStoreMaker Pro; Authorize.net Secure accounts will not work. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store discount  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish, you can use this section to set up a global discount scheme for your store. For example: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Orders exceeding $50 receive a 10% discount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Orders exceeding 5 items receive free shipping.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your settings. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shipping methods  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section deals with various shipping methods which customers can select. There are 3 main categories: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Regional&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*National&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*International&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each category can have subcategories, such as standard delivery, overnight, and so on. By default only one shipping method is provided per category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can configure a shipping method by clicking on the inspection icon (magnifying glass) beside the method, and then entering in appropriate information in the section to the right. Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; when you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can create a new shipping method under a specific shipping category by clicking the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; symbol beside the applicable category. Next, fill in all applicable information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The Instructions text area can be used to indicate the specifics of the shipping method, e.g. &amp;quot;Delivery by regular mail, allow one week for delivery&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you are finished, click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tax zones  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tax Zones interface is used to determine when a particular tax should be applied. To add a tax to a specified zone, click on the inspection tool beside the region you want to apply taxes to (for example, to apply a federal tax, add it to your country zone, e.g. &amp;quot;Canada&amp;quot;). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the drop-down menus to select a tax from the list you created in the &amp;quot;Tax Rates&amp;quot; section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also indicate if this tax is compounded or added to taxes which may apply to sub-regions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save your tax settings for that zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add other countries or zones within a country by clicking on the applicable &amp;quot;add&amp;quot; button. Enter your tax information on the right and click &amp;quot;apply&amp;quot; to save the tax settings for the new region. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tax summary  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Tax summary section lists all tax rules which you have set up using the Tax Rates and Tax Zones interfaces. This list is provided to provide you an overview and spot any potential issues. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customers  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will display a list of customers who have registered at your store. Registered customers can save their personal details (shipping address, credit card number, etc.), which speeds up the process of placing orders through your store. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can view registered customers' contact information on the right by selecting a customer from the list on the left.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Store status  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section displays useful statistics concerning your store, such as the number of products displayed for sale, number of orders waiting to be processed and number of registered customers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=773</id>
		<title>Photo Album</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=773"/>
				<updated>2013-03-13T18:41:28Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Photo Album application makes it easy for users of any level to set up an online album.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu allows you to choose whether you want to create a new photo album or manage your current ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create New Album =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a photo album for your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New Album''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a design layout &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all desired fields such as title and description &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Upload pictures by either clicking '''Add Files '''or you have the option to '''Drag and Drop'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose pictures from your files, when finished click '''Start Upload&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You may fill out a title and description for the pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you must select a style for your picture from the Drop Down menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked if you wish to '''Publish '''your album, click '''Yes '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will receive a message saying that your album has been published online &lt;br /&gt;
#You can either go back to '''Photo Editor''', '''Manage Editor '''or if you are finished click '''Close&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Albums&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit existing albums you have already created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select which album you want to work on&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether you want to '''Publish''' or '''Edit'''&lt;br /&gt;
#You may change any of the information, you can delete the album, add more photos and change the style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Yes''' to publish new changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Applications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=MediaWiki_Installer&amp;diff=772</id>
		<title>MediaWiki Installer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=MediaWiki_Installer&amp;diff=772"/>
				<updated>2013-03-13T18:32:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The MediaWiki Installer was developed to automate the installation process of MediaWiki. MediaWiki is a powerful collaborative editing software, which provides advanced features, such as online editing of page content, allowing other users to edit the content, user management and image upload. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Install MediaWiki''':'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Install MediaWiki'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select a Database User and Database Name to manage. &lt;br /&gt;
#Select '''installation directory '''or '''create a new directory'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill Administrator account settings. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter MediaWiki title (optional) and select&amp;amp;nbsp;the '''enable file uploads'''&amp;amp;nbsp;checkbox , if required. &lt;br /&gt;
#Configure settings for anonymous user, if required. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''to complete the installation.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;'''Note:''' Your administrator username has to be longer than 3 characters and your password must be longer than 5 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To Uninstall MediaWiki: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click '''Uninstall MediaWiki'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To Launch MediaWiki: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:*Click '''Go to MediaWiki'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Wordpress_Installer&amp;diff=771</id>
		<title>Wordpress Installer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Wordpress_Installer&amp;diff=771"/>
				<updated>2013-01-29T11:45:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Manage WordPress */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;WordPress is an easy-to-use Weblog system, providing numerous features like categories, ratings, as well as plugins installation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Install WordPress ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#In the Start Services section, click '''Web Design Tools'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''WordPress'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Main Menu page, click '''Install Wordpress'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#If a user does not have a database, Wordpress will create one. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter Administrator account details: Administrator username, Administrator password and Administrator email.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Your administrator username must be longer than 3 characters. Your password must be longer than 5 characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== To Uninstall Wordpress ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to uninstall WordPress, click '''Uninstall WordPress'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Go to WordPress ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Launch WordPress in a new browser window: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the Main Menu page, click '''Go to WordPress'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manage WordPress ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Access the Administrative section of Wordpress: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the Main Menu page, click '''Go to WordPress'''.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Resellers_Control_Panel&amp;diff=770</id>
		<title>Resellers Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Resellers_Control_Panel&amp;diff=770"/>
				<updated>2013-01-24T19:03:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your Reseller Control Panel. In addition to having access to all our applications and services you are able to brand your Control Panel however you like! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Branding =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the branding functionality to upload and change any of the following elements in your Control Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The prefix of the Control Panel URL/domain name &lt;br /&gt;
*The logo for the Control Panel &lt;br /&gt;
*Top navigation colors for the four main navigation icons (Home, Start Services, Shop Services and Support) &lt;br /&gt;
*Icons and hover states for the main four icons&lt;br /&gt;
*Favourite icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Reseller Home Page  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged in head over to the Resellers Branding Tab. This tab is where you can make all the changes to your Control Panel. You can now choose what colour or logo you want to appear. Customize you Control Panel to match your brand! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:01_reseller_account.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can now choose what colour or logo you want to appear. Customize you Control Panel to match your brand! Once you have completed all the changes please refresh your page. &lt;br /&gt;
Your changes should now have been applied. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: make sure you have the proper format for a favourite icon (ICO extension is required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:02_reseller_dash.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Setup]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Resellers_Control_Panel&amp;diff=769</id>
		<title>Resellers Control Panel</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Resellers_Control_Panel&amp;diff=769"/>
				<updated>2013-01-24T19:00:46Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;= Introduction =  Welcome to your Reseller Control Panel. In addition to having access to all our applications and services you are able to brand your Control Panel however yo...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Introduction =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Welcome to your Reseller Control Panel. In addition to having access to all our applications and services you are able to brand your Control Panel however you like! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Branding =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use the branding functionality to upload and change any of the following elements in your Control Panel: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*The prefix of the Control Panel URL/domain name &lt;br /&gt;
*The logo for the Control Panel &lt;br /&gt;
*Top navigation colors for the four main navigation icons (Home, Start Services, Shop Services and Support) &lt;br /&gt;
*Icons and hover states for the main four icons&lt;br /&gt;
*Favourite icon&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= &amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Reseller Home Page  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once logged in head over to the Resellers Branding Tab. This tab is where you can make all the changes to your Control Panel. You can now choose what colour or logo you want to appear. Customize you Control Panel to match your brand! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:01_reseller_account.jpg|500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can now choose what colour or logo you want to appear. Customize you Control Panel to match your brand! Once you have completed all the changes please refresh your page. &lt;br /&gt;
Your changes should now have been applied. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Note: make sure you have the proper format for a favourite icon (ICO extension is required)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:02_reseller_dash.jpg|500px|]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=768</id>
		<title>Photo Album</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=768"/>
				<updated>2013-01-11T17:29:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Main Menu */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Photo Album application makes it easy for users of any level,to set up an online album.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu allows you to choose whether you want to create a new photo album or manage your current ones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create New Album =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a photo album for your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New Album''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a design layout &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all desired fields such as title and description &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Upload pictures by either clicking '''Add Files '''or you have the option to '''Drag and Drop'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose pictures from your files, when finished click '''Start Upload&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You may fill out a title and description for the pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you must select a style for your picture from the Drop Down menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked if you wish to '''Publish '''your album, click '''Yes '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will receive a message saying that your album has been published online &lt;br /&gt;
#You can either go back to '''Photo Editor''', '''Manage Editor '''or if you are finished click '''Close&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Albums&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit existing albums you have already created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select which album you want to work on&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether you want to '''Publish''' or '''Edit'''&lt;br /&gt;
#You may change any of the information, you can delete the album, add more photos and change the style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Yes''' to publish new changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Applications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=767</id>
		<title>Photo Album</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=767"/>
				<updated>2013-01-11T17:28:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Overview */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Photo Album application makes it easy for users of any level,to set up an online album.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu allows to you to choose whether you want to create a new photo album or manage you current ones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create New Album =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a photo album for your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New Album''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a design layout &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all desired fields such as title and description &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Upload pictures by either clicking '''Add Files '''or you have the option to '''Drag and Drop'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose pictures from your files, when finished click '''Start Upload&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You may fill out a title and description for the pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you must select a style for your picture from the Drop Down menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked if you wish to '''Publish '''your album, click '''Yes '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will receive a message saying that your album has been published online &lt;br /&gt;
#You can either go back to '''Photo Editor''', '''Manage Editor '''or if you are finished click '''Close&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Albums&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit existing albums you have already created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select which album you want to work on&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether you want to '''Publish''' or '''Edit'''&lt;br /&gt;
#You may change any of the information, you can delete the album, add more photos and change the style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Yes''' to publish new changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Applications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=766</id>
		<title>Photo Album</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=766"/>
				<updated>2013-01-11T17:20:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Manage Albums */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Photo Album applications makes it easy for users of any level,to set up an online album. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu allows to you to choose whether you want to create a new photo album or manage you current ones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create New Album =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a photo album for your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New Album''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a design layout &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all desired fields such as title and description &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Upload pictures by either clicking '''Add Files '''or you have the option to '''Drag and Drop'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose pictures from your files, when finished click '''Start Upload&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You may fill out a title and description for the pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you must select a style for your picture from the Drop Down menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked if you wish to '''Publish '''your album, click '''Yes '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will receive a message saying that your album has been published online &lt;br /&gt;
#You can either go back to '''Photo Editor''', '''Manage Editor '''or if you are finished click '''Close&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Albums&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit existing albums you have already created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select which album you want to work on&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether you want to '''Publish''' or '''Edit'''&lt;br /&gt;
#You may change any of the information, you can delete the album, add more photos and change the style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Yes''' to publish new changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Applications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=765</id>
		<title>Photo Album</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=765"/>
				<updated>2013-01-11T17:19:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Create New Album */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Photo Album applications makes it easy for users of any level,to set up an online album. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu allows to you to choose whether you want to create a new photo album or manage you current ones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create New Album =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a photo album for your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New Album''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a design layout &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all desired fields such as title and description &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Upload pictures by either clicking '''Add Files '''or you have the option to '''Drag and Drop'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose pictures from your files, when finished click '''Start Upload&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You may fill out a title and description for the pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you must select a style for your picture from the Drop Down menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked if you wish to '''Publish '''your album, click '''Yes '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will receive a message saying that your album has been published online &lt;br /&gt;
#You can either go back to '''Photo Editor''', '''Manage Editor '''or if you are finished click '''Close&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Albums&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit existing albums you have already created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select which album you want to work on&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether you want to '''Publish''' or '''Edit'''&lt;br /&gt;
#You may change any of the information, you can delete the albu, add more photos and change the style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Yes''' to publish new changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Applications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Online_Forms&amp;diff=764</id>
		<title>Online Forms</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Online_Forms&amp;diff=764"/>
				<updated>2012-12-28T20:02:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: /* Results */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Overview  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This application allows you to build Online Forms to collect various data from your visitors. You can use one the form templates to create your form, but there is also a&amp;amp;nbsp;drag-and-drop feature for additional elements.&amp;amp;nbsp;You can add any&amp;amp;nbsp;of the following&amp;amp;nbsp;elements to your form: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Text &lt;br /&gt;
*Heading &lt;br /&gt;
*Text Box &lt;br /&gt;
*Password field &lt;br /&gt;
*Text Area &lt;br /&gt;
*Drop-down &lt;br /&gt;
*Check Box &lt;br /&gt;
*Radio Button &lt;br /&gt;
*Date &lt;br /&gt;
*HTML &lt;br /&gt;
*Image &lt;br /&gt;
*Button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Create New Form  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Create HTML forms in order to collect certain data from your Website visitors.&amp;amp;nbsp;You can choose one of the following template designs: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''No Template'''- opens a blank page. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Blank&amp;amp;nbsp;Email '''- opens a page with an Email field and Submit button. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Contact Request '''- opens a page with First Name, Last Name, Country, State, ZIP code, Address, Email fields and a Submit button. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Feedback '''- opens a page with first Name, Last Name, Email and a multiline text box and a Submit button. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''Support Request '''- opens a page with a Full Name, Email and multiline text box and a Submit button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating an online form is accomplished through the Create New Form wizard. You can access the wizard form the Main Menu page. You can also start the wizard by selecting Add new Form from the Manage Forms page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== To Start the Create New Form Wizard  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the Main Menu page, click '''Create New Form'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- or- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*On the Manage Forms page, click '''Add new Form'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- or- &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*click the '''New Form '''tab.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== To Create a New Form  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Choose template'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Online Forms page, select a template for your form. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Design Form'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Create New Form page, click on a form element&amp;amp;nbsp;and drag it to the board. &lt;br /&gt;
#To edit the label, click on the added element. &lt;br /&gt;
#To edit the element properties, click [[Image:Untitled1.JPG]]. &lt;br /&gt;
#To remove the element from the board, click [[Image:Untitled15.JPG]]. &lt;br /&gt;
#To edit the form properties, click&amp;amp;nbsp;'''Edit Form'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#When your form is complete, clcik '''Next'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#On the Setup Complete page, you&amp;amp;nbsp;can:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Create&amp;amp;nbsp;a new form&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Manage your existing forms&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manage Created&amp;amp;nbsp;Forms  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Manage Created&amp;amp;nbsp;Forms page&amp;amp;nbsp;allows you to change your from settings or&amp;amp;nbsp;publish, download or delete your forms. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To Edit&amp;amp;nbsp;Form Elements  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Main Menu, click Manage Created Forms. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the [[Image:Untitled1.JPG]]&amp;amp;nbsp;of the from you want to edit. &lt;br /&gt;
#When the edits are complete, click Save or Publish Form.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== To Edit Form Settings  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#On the Create New from page, click '''Edit Form'''. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a name for your form in the '''Title '''field. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a background color for your form. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose font type using the drop-down menu. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose font size. &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose font color. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter a location where you would like the submissions to be redirected, once the form is submitted. &lt;br /&gt;
#Upon submitting the form the users will be displayed with the text you enter here. &lt;br /&gt;
#To be sent an email when a form is submitted, select&amp;amp;nbsp;'''Yes '''from the Send e-mail drop-down. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an email address where you will be receiving submissions. &lt;br /&gt;
#Enter an alternative email address in the CC Email field, if required. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Apply'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Click “close” to exit from this page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Not'''e: If you click Close without clicking Apply,&amp;amp;nbsp;your changes will not be saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;'''To Publish''' your Form  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “[[Image:Untitled16.JPG]] ” to publish your form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;'''To View your Form in HTML&amp;amp;nbsp;format'''  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “[[Image:Untitled12.JPG]] ” in order to view your form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;'''To Delete a Form'''  =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on “ [[Image:Untitled15.JPG]]” to delete a form your list of existing forms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;'''Results (for v1.0 only)'''  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the format and download the results for a form you have created and published. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Design]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photos&amp;diff=763</id>
		<title>Photos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photos&amp;diff=763"/>
				<updated>2012-10-25T12:45:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Redirected page to Photo Album&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Photo_Album]] &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photos&amp;diff=762</id>
		<title>Photos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photos&amp;diff=762"/>
				<updated>2012-10-25T12:43:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: Created page with &amp;quot;[REDIRECT Photo_Album]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[REDIRECT Photo_Album]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=761</id>
		<title>Photo Album</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Photo_Album&amp;diff=761"/>
				<updated>2012-10-22T15:01:08Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Overview =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Photo Album applications makes it easy for users of any level,to set up an online album. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Main Menu =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Main Menu allows to you to choose whether you want to create a new photo album or manage you current ones. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Create New Album =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a photo album for your website: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Create New Album''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Choose a design layout &lt;br /&gt;
#Fill out all desired fields such as title and description &lt;br /&gt;
#Press '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Upload pictures by either clicking '''Add Files '''or you have the option to '''Drag and Drop'''&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose pictures from your files, when finished click '''Start Upload&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#You may fill out a title and description for the pictures&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Next you must select a style for your picture from the Drop Down menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be asked if you wish to '''Publish '''your album, click '''Yes '''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#You will receive a message saying that your album has been published online &lt;br /&gt;
#You can eithther go back to '''Photo Editor''', '''Manage Editor '''or if you are finished click '''Close&amp;amp;nbsp;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Manage Albums&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go here to administer and edit existing albums you have already created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select which album you want to work on&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#Choose whether you want to '''Publish''' or '''Edit'''&lt;br /&gt;
#You may change any of the information, you can delete the albu, add more photos and change the style&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Next&amp;amp;nbsp;''' &lt;br /&gt;
#Click '''Yes''' to publish new changes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Applications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Form_Mail&amp;diff=760</id>
		<title>Form Mail</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://websupportwiki.com/en/index.php?title=Form_Mail&amp;diff=760"/>
				<updated>2012-10-15T16:46:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;WikiSysop: WikiSysop moved page Form Mail to FormMail&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[FormMail]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>WikiSysop</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>